[go: up one dir, main page]

TW202306919A - Adjusting interior lighting based on dynamic glass tinting - Google Patents

Adjusting interior lighting based on dynamic glass tinting Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TW202306919A
TW202306919A TW111117328A TW111117328A TW202306919A TW 202306919 A TW202306919 A TW 202306919A TW 111117328 A TW111117328 A TW 111117328A TW 111117328 A TW111117328 A TW 111117328A TW 202306919 A TW202306919 A TW 202306919A
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
window
light
room
windows
tinting
Prior art date
Application number
TW111117328A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Other versions
TWI800374B (en
Inventor
羅伯特 T 羅茲畢基
艾瑞齊 R 克拉溫
布蘭登 蒂尼阿諾
涅提 特里克
強 高登 海伯特 馬修
Original Assignee
美商唯景公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 美商唯景公司 filed Critical 美商唯景公司
Publication of TW202306919A publication Critical patent/TW202306919A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TWI800374B publication Critical patent/TWI800374B/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05BELECTRIC HEATING; ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS FOR ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES, IN GENERAL
    • H05B45/00Circuit arrangements for operating light-emitting diodes [LED]
    • H05B45/20Controlling the colour of the light
    • H05B45/22Controlling the colour of the light using optical feedback
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05BELECTRIC HEATING; ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS FOR ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES, IN GENERAL
    • H05B47/00Circuit arrangements for operating light sources in general, i.e. where the type of light source is not relevant
    • H05B47/10Controlling the light source
    • H05B47/105Controlling the light source in response to determined parameters
    • H05B47/11Controlling the light source in response to determined parameters by determining the brightness or colour temperature of ambient light
    • EFIXED CONSTRUCTIONS
    • E06DOORS, WINDOWS, SHUTTERS, OR ROLLER BLINDS IN GENERAL; LADDERS
    • E06BFIXED OR MOVABLE CLOSURES FOR OPENINGS IN BUILDINGS, VEHICLES, FENCES OR LIKE ENCLOSURES IN GENERAL, e.g. DOORS, WINDOWS, BLINDS, GATES
    • E06B9/00Screening or protective devices for wall or similar openings, with or without operating or securing mechanisms; Closures of similar construction
    • E06B9/24Screens or other constructions affording protection against light, especially against sunshine; Similar screens for privacy or appearance; Slat blinds
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05BELECTRIC HEATING; ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS FOR ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES, IN GENERAL
    • H05B45/00Circuit arrangements for operating light-emitting diodes [LED]
    • H05B45/20Controlling the colour of the light
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05BELECTRIC HEATING; ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS FOR ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES, IN GENERAL
    • H05B47/00Circuit arrangements for operating light sources in general, i.e. where the type of light source is not relevant
    • H05B47/10Controlling the light source
    • H05B47/105Controlling the light source in response to determined parameters
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05BELECTRIC HEATING; ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS FOR ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES, IN GENERAL
    • H05B47/00Circuit arrangements for operating light sources in general, i.e. where the type of light source is not relevant
    • H05B47/10Controlling the light source
    • H05B47/17Operational modes, e.g. switching from manual to automatic mode or prohibiting specific operations
    • H05B47/172Emergency operational modes
    • EFIXED CONSTRUCTIONS
    • E06DOORS, WINDOWS, SHUTTERS, OR ROLLER BLINDS IN GENERAL; LADDERS
    • E06BFIXED OR MOVABLE CLOSURES FOR OPENINGS IN BUILDINGS, VEHICLES, FENCES OR LIKE ENCLOSURES IN GENERAL, e.g. DOORS, WINDOWS, BLINDS, GATES
    • E06B9/00Screening or protective devices for wall or similar openings, with or without operating or securing mechanisms; Closures of similar construction
    • E06B9/24Screens or other constructions affording protection against light, especially against sunshine; Similar screens for privacy or appearance; Slat blinds
    • E06B2009/2464Screens or other constructions affording protection against light, especially against sunshine; Similar screens for privacy or appearance; Slat blinds featuring transparency control by applying voltage, e.g. LCD, electrochromic panels
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02FOPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/15Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on an electrochromic effect
    • G02F1/163Operation of electrochromic cells, e.g. electrodeposition cells; Circuit arrangements therefor
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05BELECTRIC HEATING; ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS FOR ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES, IN GENERAL
    • H05B47/00Circuit arrangements for operating light sources in general, i.e. where the type of light source is not relevant
    • H05B47/10Controlling the light source
    • H05B47/105Controlling the light source in response to determined parameters
    • H05B47/115Controlling the light source in response to determined parameters by determining the presence or movement of objects or living beings
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05BELECTRIC HEATING; ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENTS FOR ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES, IN GENERAL
    • H05B47/00Circuit arrangements for operating light sources in general, i.e. where the type of light source is not relevant
    • H05B47/10Controlling the light source
    • H05B47/175Controlling the light source by remote control
    • YGENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
    • Y02TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
    • Y02BCLIMATE CHANGE MITIGATION TECHNOLOGIES RELATED TO BUILDINGS, e.g. HOUSING, HOUSE APPLIANCES OR RELATED END-USER APPLICATIONS
    • Y02B20/00Energy efficient lighting technologies, e.g. halogen lamps or gas discharge lamps
    • Y02B20/40Control techniques providing energy savings, e.g. smart controller or presence detection

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Structural Engineering (AREA)
  • Architecture (AREA)
  • Civil Engineering (AREA)
  • Electrochromic Elements, Electrophoresis, Or Variable Reflection Or Absorption Elements (AREA)
  • Circuit Arrangement For Electric Light Sources In General (AREA)

Abstract

Controllers and methods for automatically controlling color in a workplace based on controlling artificial lighting and tinting of tintable windows.

Description

基於動態玻璃著色調整內部照明Adjust interior lighting based on dynamic glass shading

本文中揭示之某些實施例係關於用於控制一或多個可著色窗及/或其他建築物系統之控制器及方法。Certain embodiments disclosed herein relate to controllers and methods for controlling one or more tintable windows and/or other building systems.

電致變色為材料在被置於不同電子狀態(通常因為經歷了電壓變化)時在光學性質上展現出可逆之電化學介導的變化的現象。該光學性質通常為顏色、透射率、吸收率及反射率中之一或多者。一種眾所周知之電致變色材料為氧化鎢(WO 3)。氧化鎢為其中藉由電化學還原來進行顏色轉變(透明變為藍色)之陰極電致變色材料。 電致變色材料可合併至(例如)家用、商用及其他用途之窗中。可藉由在電致變色材料中引致變化而改變此類窗之顏色、透射率、吸收率及/或反射率,亦即,電致變色窗為可用電子方式變暗或變亮之窗。向窗之電致變色裝置施加的小電壓將會使其變暗,且反轉該電壓會使其變亮。此能力允許控制穿過窗之光的量,且使電致變色窗有機會用作節能裝置。 雖然電致變色在20世紀60年代被發現,但遺憾的係,儘管電致變色技術、設備及製造及/或使用電致變色裝置之相關方法近來取得了許多進步,但電致變色裝置且尤其係電致變色窗仍遇到各種問題且尚未開始實現其巨大之商業潛力。 Electrochromism is the phenomenon in which materials exhibit reversible, electrochemically mediated changes in optical properties when placed in different electronic states, usually as a result of undergoing a voltage change. The optical property is typically one or more of color, transmittance, absorptivity, and reflectance. One well known electrochromic material is tungsten oxide (WO 3 ). Tungsten oxide is a cathodic electrochromic material in which the color change (transparent to blue) occurs by electrochemical reduction. Electrochromic materials can be incorporated into, for example, windows for domestic, commercial, and other uses. The color, transmittance, absorptivity and/or reflectivity of such windows can be changed by inducing changes in the electrochromic material, ie, electrochromic windows are windows that can be dimmed or brightened electronically. Applying a small voltage to the electrochromic device of the window will darken it, and reversing the voltage will brighten it. This capability allows control of the amount of light passing through the window and opens up the opportunity for electrochromic windows to be used as energy saving devices. Although electrochromic was discovered in the 1960s, unfortunately, despite many recent advances in electrochromic technology, equipment, and related methods of manufacturing and/or using electrochromic devices, electrochromic devices and especially Series electrochromic windows still suffer from various problems and have not yet begun to realize their great commercial potential.

某些態樣係關於用於調整建築物系統(例如,基於動態玻璃著色來調整內部照明)以維持環境條件之方法及系統。一個態樣係關於用於調整內部照明以藉由房間中之一或多個已著色窗增強顏色顯現及/或偏移對比率的控制邏輯。 在本文中闡述薄膜光學裝置(例如,用於窗之電致變色裝置)及用於使用此類裝置來控制可著色窗之轉變及其他功能的方法及控制器。某些實施例包括具有兩個或更多個著色(或賦色)區之一電致變色窗,該等著色區(例如)由單片電致變色裝置塗層形成為實體上分開之區或在該單片裝置塗層中建立著色區。可藉助於用於向電致變色裝置施加電位之構件及/或藉由相鄰著色區之間的電阻區域及/或藉由將該裝置在實體上分叉成著色區來界定著色區。舉例而言,一組匯流條可經組態以跨該單片電致變色裝置之單獨著色區中之每一者施加電位以選擇性地使區著色。方法亦可應用於具有一或多個可著色窗之組,其中個別窗獨立於其他窗而著色以便最大化佔用者體驗,亦即,眩光控制、熱舒適性等。 某些態樣係關於隔熱玻璃單元(IGU),該隔熱玻璃單元包括第一窗片,該第一窗片包括安置於第一透明基板上之第一電致變色裝置且包括複數個可獨立控制之著色區及在相鄰之可獨立控制之著色區之間的電阻區域。該IGU進一步包括第二窗片及在該第一窗片與該第二窗片之間的間隔件。在一種情況中,該第二窗片包括安置於第二透明基板上之第二電致變色裝置。在一種情況中,該IGU進一步包括位於(例如) IGU之頂部部分中的採光區,其中該採光區包括保持於脫色狀態以允許太陽光穿過該第一窗片及該第二窗片的一或多個著色區。 一個態樣係關於一種自動地控制具有一或多個可著色窗之房間中之光顏色的方法。該方法包括判定對該房間中之人工內部照明的調整以獲得所要光顏色及經由通信網路發送調整該人工內部照明之控制信號。基於該一或多個可著色窗中之每一者的當前著色狀態來判定該等調整。在一個實例中,該房間中之該所要光顏色與減小佔用區域中之對比率使之處於可接受範圍內或低於最大對比率相關聯。 一個態樣係關於一種用於自動地控制具有一或多個可著色窗之房間中之光顏色的控制器。該控制器包括:一電腦可讀媒體,該電腦可讀媒體具有控制邏輯;以及一處理器,該處理器經由一通信網路與該電腦可讀媒體及與該一或多個可著色窗通信。該控制邏輯經組態以:判定對該房間中之人工內部照明之調整以在該房間中獲得一所要光顏色,其中基於該一或多個可著色窗之一當前著色狀態來判定該等調整;以及經由該通信網路發送調整該人工內部照明之控制信號。 一個態樣係關於一種控制具有一或多個可著色窗之工作場所中的場景之環境因素的方法。該方法包括:判定工作場所之一類型及佔用之一類型;基於建築物系統之控制的可用性來界定一組環境因素;基於該工作場所之該類型及佔用之該類型來計算該場景之該等環境因素的目標等級;判定用於獲得該等環境因素之該等目標等級的對該等建築物系統之調整,其中基於該一或多個可著色窗之當前著色等級來判定該等調整;以及經由一通信網路發送調整該等建築物系統之控制信號。 一個態樣係關於一種用於自動地控制具有一或多個可著色窗之工作場所中的場景之環境因素的控制器。該控制器包括:一電腦可讀媒體,該電腦可讀媒體具有控制邏輯;以及一處理器,該處理器經由一通信網路與該電腦可讀媒體及與該一或多個可著色窗通信。該控制邏輯經組態以:判定該工作場所中之佔用;判定工作場所之一類型及佔用之一類型;基於建築物系統之控制的可用性來界定該場景中之一組環境因素;基於該工作場所之該類型及佔用之該類型來計算該場景之該等環境因素的目標等級;判定用於獲得該等環境因素之該等目標等級的對該等建築物系統之調整,其中基於該一或多個可著色窗之當前著色等級來判定該等調整;以及經由一通信網路發送調整該等建築物系統之控制信號。 將在下文參考圖式來更詳細地闡述此等及其他特徵及實施例。 Certain aspects relate to methods and systems for adjusting building systems (eg, adjusting interior lighting based on dynamic glass tinting) to maintain environmental conditions. One aspect relates to control logic for adjusting interior lighting to enhance color appearance and/or offset contrast ratios through one or more tinted windows in a room. Described herein are thin film optical devices, such as electrochromic devices for windows, and methods and controllers for controlling transitions and other functions of tintable windows using such devices. Certain embodiments include an electrochromic window having two or more colored (or colored) regions formed as physically separate regions, for example, from a monolithic electrochromic device coating or Colored regions are established in the monolithic device coating. Colored regions may be defined by means of means for applying a potential to the electrochromic device and/or by resistive regions between adjacent colored regions and/or by physically bifurcating the device into colored regions. For example, a set of bus bars can be configured to apply a potential across each of the individual colored regions of the monolithic electrochromic device to selectively color the regions. The method can also be applied to groups of one or more tintable windows, where individual windows are tinted independently of other windows in order to maximize occupant experience, ie, glare control, thermal comfort, and the like. Certain aspects relate to an insulating glass unit (IGU) comprising a first window comprising a first electrochromic device disposed on a first transparent substrate and comprising a plurality of operable Independently controllable colored regions and resistive regions between adjacent independently controllable colored regions. The IGU further includes a second window and a spacer between the first window and the second window. In one instance, the second window includes a second electrochromic device disposed on a second transparent substrate. In one case, the IGU further includes a daylighting zone located, for example, in a top portion of the IGU, wherein the daylighting zone includes a daylighting zone maintained in a decolorized state to allow sunlight to pass through the first window and the second window. or multiple shaded areas. One aspect relates to a method of automatically controlling the color of light in a room having one or more tintable windows. The method includes determining adjustments to artificial interior lighting in the room to obtain a desired light color and sending control signals to adjust the artificial interior lighting over a communications network. The adjustments are determined based on the current tinting state of each of the one or more tintable windows. In one example, the desired light color in the room is associated with reducing the contrast ratio in the occupied area to within an acceptable range or below a maximum contrast ratio. One aspect relates to a controller for automatically controlling the color of light in a room having one or more tintable windows. The controller includes: a computer readable medium having control logic; and a processor in communication with the computer readable medium and with the one or more tintable windows via a communications network . The control logic is configured to: determine adjustments to artificial interior lighting in the room to obtain a desired color of light in the room, wherein the adjustments are determined based on a current tinting state of the one or more tintable windows ; and sending a control signal for adjusting the artificial interior lighting via the communication network. One aspect relates to a method of controlling environmental factors of a scene in a workplace having one or more tintable windows. The method includes: determining a type of workplace and a type of occupancy; defining a set of environmental factors based on the availability of controls for building systems; a target level for the environmental factor; determining adjustments to the building systems to achieve the target level for the environmental factor, wherein the adjustments are determined based on the current tinting level of the one or more tintable windows; and Control signals for adjusting the building systems are sent via a communication network. One aspect relates to a controller for automatically controlling environmental factors of a scene in a workplace having one or more tintable windows. The controller includes: a computer readable medium having control logic; and a processor in communication with the computer readable medium and with the one or more tintable windows via a communications network . The control logic is configured to: determine occupancy in the workplace; determine a type of workplace and a type of occupancy; define a set of environmental factors in the scenario based on the availability of controls for building systems; the type of site and the type of occupancy to calculate the target levels for the environmental factors of the scene; determine the adjustments to the building systems used to obtain the target levels for the environmental factors, where the one or determining the adjustments based on current tinting levels of a plurality of tintable windows; and sending control signals for adjusting the building systems via a communication network. These and other features and embodiments will be explained in more detail below with reference to the drawings.

在以下闡述中,陳述眾多具體細節以便提供對所呈現實施例之透徹理解。可在無此等具體細節中之一些或全部的情況下實踐所揭示實施例。在其他情況中,未詳細地闡述眾所周知之控制操作以免不必要地掩蓋所揭示實施例。雖然將結合特定實施例來闡述所揭示實施例,但將理解不希望限制所揭示實施例。本文中闡述之某些實施例雖然未如此限制但特別適合用於電致變色裝置。相對於用於控制一或多個可著色窗或控制多區窗中之著色區的技術來闡述某些實施例。將理解,此等技術亦可用於使可著色窗組(或區)中、多區窗中或此類窗之組合中的個別窗著色。另外地或另選地,此等技術可用於控制各種建築物系統,包括具有一或多個可著色窗之系統。 I. 對可著色窗之介紹 本文中闡述之某些實施方案係關於控制可著色窗(例如,電致變色窗)之著色及其他功能。在一些實施方案中,可著色窗呈隔熱玻璃單元之形式,該隔熱玻璃單元包括兩個或更多個窗片及密封於該等窗片之間的間隔件。每一可著色窗具有至少一個可著色窗片/窗板,該至少一個可著色窗片/窗板具有光學可切換裝置。本文中相對於具有電致變色窗片之可著色窗來闡述一些實例,該電致變色窗片具有安置於透明基板(諸如玻璃)上之電致變色裝置。在一個實施方案中,電致變色窗片具有一單片電致變色裝置,該電致變色裝置安置於基板之處於可著色窗之可見區域中的至少一部分上。製作具有多個著色區之電致變色窗片的方法之詳細實例可見於標題為「Multi-Zone EC Windows」且在2013年3月13日提交之美國專利申請案第14/137,644號(頒佈為美國專利第9,341,912號)中,該申請案特此以引用方式整體併入。 如上文所提到,本文中討論之某些技術與控制可著色(例如,在一區及/或多區窗中)及/或控制建築物中之其他系統的功能有關。 - 多區窗中之電阻區域 本文中討論之一些技術與獨立地控制多區可著色窗(諸如多區電致變色窗)中之著色(或賦色)區中之每一者有關。「電阻區域」(本文中有時亦被稱作「電阻區」)一般係指電致變色裝置中之一區域,在該區域中,該電致變色裝置之一或多個層之功能受損(部分地或完全地),但裝置功能跨越電阻區並未切斷。在一個實施方案中,電致變色窗片之著色區藉助相鄰著色區之間的電阻區域藉由用於向電致變色裝置施加電位以獨立地控制著色區中之著色的技術而界定。舉例而言,單組匯流條或多組不同匯流條可經組態而能夠獨立地向每一著色區獨立地施加電位以藉此選擇性地使其著色。關於上文提到之電阻區域,此區域允許單個單片電致變色裝置之相鄰著色區的獨立可控著色,而不會損害電阻區域自身中之著色功能性。亦即,電阻區域可著色。此等技術之一個優點為不使用切穿著色區之間的電致變色裝置之劃片線。此等劃片線可能會產生電致變色裝置之非功能區域,該等非功能區域可能會在著色時在窗之可見區域中產生視覺上可感知之亮線。反而,電阻區域可在保持於不同著色狀態之相鄰著色區之間具有平緩之著色梯度。此著色梯度使相鄰著色區之間的著色轉變融合以使著色區之間的過渡區域之外觀變柔和。 在一些實例中,多區窗在單片電致變色裝置之相鄰著色區之間的區域中具有電阻區域。此等電阻區域可實現更均一之著色正面,例如,在與匯流條供電機制結合使用時。在某些實例中,電阻區域相對較窄,具有在約1 mm與1000 nm寬之間的寬度,或相對較寬,具有在約1 mm與約10 mm寬之間的寬度。在大多數情況中,電阻區域中之電致變色材料著色,使得其不會留下習知雷射隔離劃片線通常會留下之亮線對比效應。因此,在其他實例中,電阻區域可(例如)寬於1 mm、寬於10 mm、寬於15 mm等。 電阻區域能夠著色之原因係因為其並非電致變色裝置在實體上分叉成兩個裝置,而是在實體上修改單個電致變色裝置及/或其在電阻區域內之相關聯透明導體。電阻區域為電致變色裝置之一區域,在該區域中,該裝置之活性,具體而言為電阻率及/或對離子移動之阻力大於電致變色裝置之其餘部分。因此,可修改透明導體中之一者或兩者使其在電阻區域中具有增加之電阻率,及/或可修改電致變色裝置堆疊,使得離子移動在電阻區域中相對於相鄰著色區中之電致變色裝置堆疊要慢。在此電阻區域中,電致變色裝置仍運作、著色及脫色,但相對於電致變色裝置之其餘部分以較慢之速率及/或以較小之著色強度來進行。舉例而言,電阻區域可與相鄰著色區中之電致變色裝置的其餘部分一樣充分地著色,但電阻區域比相鄰著色區著色要慢得多。在另一實例中,電阻區域可能不如相鄰著色區般充分地著色,或按著色梯度來著色。 在標題為「MULTI-ZONE EC WINDOWS」且在2016年5月25日提交之美國專利申請案15/039,370及標題為「MULTI-ZONE EC WINDOWS」且在2014年12月18日提交之國際PCT申請案PCT/US14/71314中闡述多區電致變色窗之電阻區域及其他特徵的詳情,該兩件申請案特此以引用方式整體併入。 II. 著色考慮因素 控制一或多個可著色窗之著色狀態及其他建築物系統之動機係為了佔用者好及/或僅出於建築物之考慮,例如,能量節省、功率要求及類似者。此處,「佔用者」一般係指有一或多個可著色窗被控制之特定房間或其他空間中的一個或多個個體,且「建築物」一般係指建築物管理系統(BMS)及照明、HVAC及其他建築物系統。與佔用有關之動機包括(例如)如可能會受房間中之照明及一已著色窗或一組已著色窗之美感影響的整體健康。動機包括(例如)控制來自照射至佔用者之工作場所上之直射太陽光的眩光、透過窗向建築物外部看之可見性(其「視野」)、可著色窗之顏色及房間中之相關聯光顏色,及調整著色狀態以阻擋直射太陽光進入房間中或使直射太陽光透射至房間中而獲得之熱舒適性。雖然佔用者可能想要大體上避免眩光照射至其工作場所,但其亦可能想要允許一些太陽光穿過窗以獲得自然照明。在相較於來自(例如)白熾、發光二極體(LED)或螢光照明之人工照明,佔用者更喜歡太陽光時,情況可能如此。此外,已發現,某些可著色窗在其較暗之著色狀態下可能會對房間賦予過多之藍色。可藉由允許一部分未經過濾之日光進入房間及/或藉由人工照明來偏移此藍色。與建築物有關之使用者動機包括經由減少加熱、空氣調節及照明而降低能量使用。舉例而言,吾人可能想要使窗著色以使某量之太陽光透射穿過窗,使得需要較少能量來進行人工照明及/或加熱。吾人亦可能想要採集太陽光以收集太陽能且補償加熱需求。 另一考慮因素(或許係建築物管理者與佔用者共同的)與安全問題有關。就此而言,可能希望窗著色成較暗的,使得房間外部之人無法看到佔用者。或者,可能希望窗處於清透狀態,使得(例如)建築物外部之鄰居或警察能看到建築物內部以識別任何惡意行為。舉例而言,使用者或建築物運營者可將窗置於「緊急模式」,在一種情況中,該緊急模式可使窗變清透。 A. 眩光控制 在許多情況中,眩光避免可能係對可著色窗做出著色決定的多達95%之原因。在2015年5月7日提交且標題為「CONTROL METHOD FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS」之國際PCT申請案第PCT/US15/29675號中詳細地闡述了考慮到眩光避免而對可著色窗做出著色決定的方法之實例,該申請案特此以引用方式整體併入。在此等方法中,使用以名稱Intelligence®獲得商標之專用控制邏輯(由Milpitas, California之View, Inc.製造),在邏輯模組A之操作中處理眩光。在模組A中,決定基於藉由透過窗射入房間中之太陽輻射導致之穿透深度或眩光區域來判定是否調整可著色窗之著色狀態。若其中太陽輻射照射房間之穿透深度或眩光區域與佔用者之位置或可能位置(佔用區域)重疊,則立面中之可著色窗保持於或轉變至較暗著色狀態以便減少此佔用區域上之眩光。現有演算法以其他使用者舒適性考慮因素為代價基於眩光使(例如)與建築物空間相關聯之整組窗著色。 本文中之方法藉由使一組可著色窗中之一或多個窗及/或一或多個多區窗之個別著色區獨立地著色(例如)以解決眩光同時亦允許自然日光進入空間中且因此同時解決多個使用者舒適性問題及/或建築物系統要求而向著色決策提供粒度及靈活性。舉例而言,減少眩光為通常與減少建築物之加熱負荷、增加自然照明等不一致之目標。在冬天,例如,可藉由使可著色窗變清透以允許更多太陽輻射進入房間而減少加熱系統用於對房間加熱之能量,使可著色窗變清透亦可能會在佔用區域中產生眩光情形。在本文中闡述之某些組態中,可控制多區可著色窗(或一組窗中之個別窗)以藉由將該窗(或一組窗中之子集)中被置於變暗著色之區域限制於減少佔用者在房間中之位置或可能位置上之眩光的彼等著色區來解決此問題。雖然本文中相對於控制多區可著色窗中之著色區來闡述許多實例,但將理解,類似技術將應用於多個可著色窗之總成,每一可著色窗具有一或多個著色區。舉例而言,可控制可著色窗之總成以將該窗總成中被置於變暗著色之區域限制於減少在佔用區域上之眩光的彼等可著色窗及/或可著色窗內之著色區。 B. 調整色覺 用於以特定方式控制可著色窗之其他實施方案可能會減少著色或脫色狀態之窗的色覺及/或穿過著色或脫色狀態之窗的光之顏色的色覺。此等實施方案利用將對與特定著色狀態相關聯之非所要顏色的感知降至最低的光學性質。 作為一個實例,光學可切換裝置(例如,電致變色裝置)之變暗著色狀態可具有佔用者可感知到之藍色。然而,若房間中之已著色窗與更多日光照射之清透區窗並置,則佔用者可能較不會注意到已著色窗之藍色。舉例而言,特定窗可處於較暗之著色狀態且可能會向佔用者顯現為藍色。在眩光減少著色組態之一個實施方案中,可將相鄰或鄰近之窗置於清透狀態,只要其不會歸因於其相對位置而對佔用者產生眩光便可。穿過清透窗之光可減少佔用者原本可能會感知到的藍色之感知。 在另一實施方案中,擴散光源(諸如黏附至可著色窗之擴散或散射膜)可減少已著色窗中之藍色的感知。舉例而言,擴散或散射膜可安置於IGU之電致變色窗片的配對窗片上。在另一實例中,擴散或散射膜可安置於無光學可切換裝置(諸如電致變色裝置)之窗片的表面上。 C. 光採集 其他著色組態可涉及最大化光採集。光採集係來自窗外部之太陽輻射藉以轉換成電能以供窗、建築物使用或用於其他目的的概念。可使用在窗之適當部分上(諸如在IGU之配對窗片上)之光伏膜、其他光伏結構或其他光採集結構來完成光採集。在一個實例中,藉由設置於電致變色窗之中或之上的光伏電池來完成光採集。 一個考慮因素為光伏電池或其他光採集結構在被收集之入射光以法線或近似法線方向進入時可能最有效。可藉由在該窗中設有一結構來促進此情形,該結構對該窗上之入射光重定向使之以法線或近似法線方向照射光伏電池而最大化能量產生。在一些情況中,可在可著色窗之一部分上使用光擴散器或水平引導結構來將光引導至窗之適當部分上(諸如配對窗片上)的光伏膜、其他光伏結構或其他光採集結構上。 另一考慮因素為在正常情形中可能希望配對窗片上之光伏膜儘可能地透明。然而,製造成透明之光伏膜在將太陽光轉換成電能時與較不透明之膜或不僅是不透明膜而更是或許使光更大程度地散射之膜相比通常相對效率低下。認識到,在窗之一區域中可能存在通常負責防止房間中之眩光情形且因此通常必須要著色的某些著色區,及/或在此區域外部可能存在在其中佔用者通常將能夠觀看外部環境之某些區。在一個實施方案中,此區域中之著色區具有相較於此區域外部之區對光採集更有效但散射程度更大或較不透明之光伏膜。在另一實施方案中,此區域中之著色區具有光伏膜,而此區域外部之區不具有光伏膜。 關於由於窗之上部區域產生大多數眩光而在該區中水平地引導、反射、散射或擴散入射光之情形,類似地,根據另一實施方案,可著色窗之上部區域可配備有更有效,但光學上令人不怎麼愉悅之類型的光伏膜。 - IGU 窗片面上之光伏電池的示例性位置 在某些實施方案中,一可著色窗包括光伏(PV)電池/面板。該PV面板可位於該窗上之任何地方,只要其能夠吸收太陽能便可。舉例而言,PV面板可完全地或部分地位於窗之可見區域中,及/或完全地或部分地位於窗之框架中/上。具有PV電池/面板之電致變色窗的實例之詳情可見於標題為「PHOTOVOLTAIC-ELECTROCHROMIC WINDOWS」且在2016年3月25日提交之美國臨時專利申請案62/247,719中,該申請案特此以引用方式整體併入。 PV電池/面板可實施為遮蓋可著色窗之窗片的一或多個表面的薄膜。在某些實施方案中,可著色窗呈具有兩個個別窗片(窗板)之IGU的形式,每一窗片具有兩個表面(未算上邊緣)。自建築物之外部向內算起,第一表面(亦即,外窗板之面向外之表面)可被稱作表面1 (S1),下一個表面(亦即,外窗板之面向內之表面)可被稱作表面2 (S2),下一個表面(亦即,內窗板之面向外之表面)可被稱作表面3 (S3),且剩餘表面(亦即,內窗板之面向內之表面)可被稱作表面4 (S4)。可在表面1-4中之任何一或多者上實施PV薄膜。 在某些實例中,將PV膜施加至IGU或其他多窗片窗總成中之窗片表面中之至少一者。合適PV膜之實例可購自Santa Barbara, CA之Next Energy Technologies Inc.。在一些情況中,PV膜可為有機半傳導墨水,且可印刷/塗佈至表面上。 習知上,在PV電池預計與多區電致變色窗結合使用之情況下,EC裝置相對於PV電池/面板朝向建築物內部定位,使得在EC裝置處於著色狀態時,EC裝置不會減少PV電池/面板收集之能量。因而,可在外窗板(窗片)之面向外之表面上,例如,在IGU之表面1上,實施PV電池/面板。然而,某些敏感性PV電池不能暴露於外部環境條件且因此無法可靠地在面向外之表面上實施。舉例而言,PV電池可能會對氧氣及濕度敏感。 為了解決此類PV膜之空氣及水敏感性,可將膜定位於表面2或3上,如此幫助防止該膜暴露於氧氣及濕度。在一些情況中,電致變色材料之堆疊位於表面3上且PV薄膜位於表面2上。在另一實例中,電致變色材料之堆疊位於表面2上且PV膜位於表面3上。 在一個態樣中,PV膜位於S3上,且多區窗具有在S2上有多個著色區之電致變色裝置。在此種情況中,一或多個區可保持於脫色著色狀態,諸如在允許自然光高程度地進入房間中之採光著色區中(例如,按橫框窗組態)。在此種情況中,將太陽光饋至S3上之PV膜,而其他區(例如,按橫框窗組態,為下部窗)可保持著色,例如,以進行眩光控制。在此種情況中,PV膜接收太陽光且不需要光。 4. 對比率 如本文中所使用,「對比率」係指自藉由多個光源照亮之表面反射的光之強度的對比。在大多數實例中相對於藉由多個光源照明之表面的兩個區域(被稱作「第一部分」及「第二部分」)來闡述對比率。第一部分係指主要藉由提供具有第一強度之光照的第一光源照亮之區域。第二部分係指第一部分附近或周圍之區域,該區域藉由具有與第一強度不同之第二強度的光照來照亮。在一個實例中,透射穿過處於最暗著色狀態之電致變色窗之孔隙的為黃色之光在房間裏之桌子的頂面上產生藍色之光投射。透射穿過電致變色窗之光具有比照亮桌面之環境光高的強度。在啟動人工光之前,在藉由房間中之環境光照亮的桌子區域之第一部分與相鄰之第二部分中自桌子上之光投射反射之藍光之間存在強度對比。隨後,啟動提供紅光及黃光之人造光源來照亮桌面。桌面反射來自藍光之光投射與來自人造光源之紅光及黃光的光以自該第一部分反射藍光、紅光及黃光。桌面亦在主要藉由人造光源照亮之第二部分中反射紅光及黃光。來自人工照明之紅光及黃光可偏移或「洗掉」自第一部分與第二部分反射之光之間的對比。 1A-1C繪示了根據實施方案之房間 150之透視圖的示意圖,該房間具有在建築物外部與房間 150內部之間的垂直牆壁中之可著色窗 160。可著色窗 160如圖所示處於變暗著色狀態。房間 150亦具有位於房間 150之垂直牆壁上的第一人造光源 152、第二人造光源 154及第三人造光源 156。房間 150亦具有佔用區域 170,例如,桌子或另一工作場所。在此實例中,佔用區域 170被界定為房間 150之地板上的二維區域。在一個實施方案中,第一、第二及第三人造光源 152 154 156中之一或多者可為可調人工照明,該可調人工照明可被調為各種設置,諸如波長範圍、照度及/或照明方向。 在 1A中所示之第一種情形中,太陽光(繪示為實線箭頭)如圖所示照射處於著色狀態之可著色窗 160。透射穿過可著色窗 160之光(繪示為虛線箭頭)在房間 150之地板的第一部分 162處產生二維光投射。在此種情形中,關閉第一人造光源 152、第二人造光源 154及第三人造光源 156。房間中之環境光照亮房間 150在第一部分 162周圍之第二部分 180中之地板。透射穿過可著色窗之光具有比照亮地板之環境光高的強度。來自主要藉由透射穿過可著色窗之光照亮之較亮第一部分 162的反射光與來自主要藉由環境光照亮之第二部分 180的反射光存在強度對比(對比率)。在此種情形中,在第一部分 162與第二部分 180之間的界面處之對比未處於佔用區域 170中。 在 1B中所示之第二種情形中,太陽光(繪示為實線箭頭)如圖所示照射處於著色狀態之可著色窗 160,且關閉第一人造光源 152、第二人造光源 154及第三人造光源 156。在此第二種情形中,太陽在天空中比在第一種情形中高。透射穿過可著色窗 160之光(繪示為虛線箭頭)產生二維光投射,該二維光投射照亮房間 150之地板上的第一部分 162。第一部分 162與佔用區域 170重疊。透射穿過可著色窗之光具有比照亮地板之環境光高的強度。來自主要藉由該光投射照亮之較亮第一部分 162的反射光與來自第一部分 162周圍之第二部分 180的反射光存在強度對比(對比率)。在此種情形中,在第一部分 162與第二部分 180之間的界面處之對比處於佔用區域 170中。 1C中所示之第三種情形繪示了如 1B中所示之照明情形,但增加藉由方向箭頭繪示之第一人造光源 152的啟動。在此種情形中,第一人造光源 152照亮地板之二維第三部分 190,偏移或「洗掉」來自 1B中所示之第一部分 162與第二部分 180之反射光之間的對比。 2A-2B繪示了根據實施方案之房間 250之透視圖的示意圖,該房間具有在建築物外部與房間 250內部之間的垂直牆壁中之可著色窗 260。可著色窗 260處於變暗著色狀態。房間 250亦具有位於房間 250之垂直牆壁中的第一人造光源 252、第二人造光源 254及第三人造光源 256。房間 250亦具有佔用區域 270,例如,桌子或另一工作場所。在此實例中,佔用區域 270被界定為房間 250之地板上的二維區域。在一個實施方案中,第一、第二及第三人造光源 252 254 256中之一或多者可為可調人工照明,該可調人工照明可被調為各種設置,諸如波長範圍、照度及/或照明方向。 在 2A中所示之第四種情形中,太陽光(繪示為虛線箭頭)如圖所示照射處於著色狀態之可著色窗 260。在此第四種情形中,透射穿過可著色窗 260之光(繪示為實線箭頭)在房間 250之地板上與具有可著色窗 260之垂直牆壁很接近的第一部分 266處產生二維光投射。第三人造光源 256被啟動且照亮地板之第二部分 292。第二部分 292與佔用區域 270重疊。透射穿過可著色窗 260之光具有比照亮在第一部分 266周圍的地板之第三部分 280的環境光高的強度。來自第二部分 292與第三部分 280之反射光存在強度對比。 2B中所示之第五種情形繪示了如 2A中所示之類似照明情形,但增加來自藉由方向箭頭繪示之第一人造光源 152的照明。在此種情形中,第一人造光源 152被啟動且照亮地板之二維第四部分 290,偏移來自 2A中所示之第二部分 292與第三部分 280之反射光之間的對比。 某些實施例涉及判定及傳送建築物系統之新設置(諸如可著色窗之著色狀態)及人工照明之設置的控制邏輯,其中藉由該控制邏輯判定該等新設置以減小佔用區域(諸如桌子或其他工作表面)中之對比率。舉例而言,該控制邏輯可判定可調人造光源之設置以將其調為紅光及黃光之波長及/或可著色窗之較亮著色等級以減小穿過已著色窗之光投射中之藍色的深度。在此實例中,來自人造光源之紅光與黃光之組合與穿過已著色窗之光投射之藍光組合以產生紅光、黃光及藍光,例如,較接近於自然光光譜之光譜內容。此組合減小了主要藉由藍光之光投射照亮之區域與藉由人造光源照亮之區域之間的顏色及強度之對比。 在某些實施方案中,該控制邏輯基於佔用區域中之當前對比率來調整建築物系統之功能,該當前對比率係根據來自建築物系統之回饋而判定。舉例而言,可基於佔用區域中之當前照度來判定佔用區域中之對比率,該當前照度係依據以下一或多者來判定:來自建築物中之一或多個感測器(例如,攝影機、熱感測器等)之量測結果、人工照明之當前設置及位置等。可使用光譜儀(諸如,例如,由Sekonic ®製造之市售C-7000 spectromaster)來量測環境光之照度及顏色。該控制邏輯調整建築物系統之功能以將佔用區域中之對比率調整為可接受等級。舉例而言,可調整建築物系統,使得對比率低於在可接受範圍內或低於最大極限值。作為另一實例,可調整建築物系統,使得基於人工照明之照度的查找表使對比率維持於可接受等級內,該人工照明可用於偏移來自穿過具有不同著色等級之電致變色窗的光投射之反射光。 將在本揭示案之其他小節中闡述為了佔用者好及/或僅為了建築物而控制一或多個可著色窗之著色狀態及其他建築物系統的其他考慮因素。舉例而言,包括晝夜節律調整之佔用者健康為下文討論之考慮因素。 B. 用於眩光控制及 / 或其他考慮因素之著色組態的實例 在本小節中在大多數情況中參考多區可著色窗來闡述用於眩光減少之組態的實例。將理解,此等實例亦可類似地應用於一組可著色窗或多區窗與單片可著色窗之組合。 a) 藉由採光進行眩光控制 在一個特定眩光減少組態中,控制一多區可著色窗以將著色區置於(保持於或轉變至)變暗狀態,該等著色區處於該可著色窗中可減少佔用者之位置或可能位置上之眩光的區域中,同時將該多區可著色窗之其他著色區置於較亮之著色狀態以允許環境光進入以(例如)減少加熱/照明。此組態可用於「採光」。如本文中使用,「採光」一般係指使用自然光來滿足照明要求及潛在之顏色偏移同時減輕佔用者之潛在視覺不適(諸如,例如,由眩光造成)的建築策略。眩光可來自照射至佔用者之工作場所上或射入佔用者眼睛中之直射太陽光。本文中闡述之此組態及其他採光實例可提供多種好處,包括歸因於房間中增加之自然光導致視覺感知變化而減少來自已著色區中之光的藍色。如上文所提到,將理解,此等實例亦類似地應用於保持於或轉變至變暗之一或多個可著色窗,同時其他可著色窗保持於較亮之著色狀態,以實現採光。 - 下部區域處之較亮著色 在此組態中,控制一多區可著色窗或一組可著色窗,使得下部區域比其他區域亮。在此眩光控制組態之一個實例中,控制垂直牆壁中之一多區窗的下部著色區使之著色成比該多區窗中之一或多個上部著色窗亮。作為此眩光控制組態之另一實例,控制垂直牆壁中之下部可著色窗使之著色成比該垂直牆壁中之一或多個上部可著色窗亮。例如,在太陽在天空中處於中間位置至高位置且該下部區域可處於低位置使得以使直射太陽光不會深深射入房間中且因此不會在位於窗附近之佔用區域中產生眩光的角度來接收太陽光的情形中,可使用該控制組態。在此種情況中,可使下部區域變清透或以允許最多光進入房間中且最小化加熱房間所需之熱負荷的方式來控制下部區域,同時可使中間及/或頂部區域變暗以減少佔用區域上之眩光。 - 頂部區域處之較亮著色 在此組態中,控制一多區可著色窗或一組可著色窗,使得頂部區域比下部區域亮。舉例而言,可使著色區(或頂部處之多個著色區)著色成比該多區可著色窗之一或多個著色區或該窗之頂部區域亮。在另一實例中,該窗之頂部區域可僅具有透明基板(無光學可切換裝置)。作為另一實例,控制垂直牆壁之頂部區域中的上部可著色窗使之著色成比垂直牆壁中之一或多個其他可著色窗亮。在此等實例中,較亮之頂部區域可藉由允許自然環境光高程度地進入房間中同時在垂直牆壁附近控制眩光來以與「橫框窗」類似之方式起作用。本文中闡述之此實例及其他採光實例可提供多種好處,包括歸因於房間中增加之自然光導致視覺感知變化而減少來自穿過已著色區/窗之光的藍色。 3為根據一實施例的具有一多區可著色窗 300之此實例的示意圖,該多區可著色窗具有五個著色區。多區可著色窗 300位於建築物之內部與外部之間、在房間 350之外部垂直牆壁中。多區可著色窗 300包括在窗 300之頂部處的第一著色區 302及在第一著色區 302下方之四個其他著色區 304306308310。 在 3中示出之所示情形中,太陽在天空中處於高位置。在此情形中,控制著色區,使得第一著色區 302處於第一著色狀態,亦即,最亮之著色狀態(例如,脫色或清透狀態),且其他著色區 304306308310處於比該第一著色狀態暗之第二著色狀態。就所示之著色控制組態而言,第一著色區 302允許來自高空之太陽的自然光進入房間中同時防止來自投射至具有桌子及佔用者之佔用區域上之直射太陽光的眩光。反而,穿過第一著色區 302之直射太陽光將眩光投射(藉由箭頭繪示)至房間之未佔用區域上。雖然在此所示實例中使用五個區,但可使用其他數目及佈置之著色區。 在此眩光組態之另一實例中,一多區可著色窗可包括無光學裝置之僅頂部透明基板部分及具有光學可切換裝置之底部部分,該光學可切換裝置具有一或多個著色區。舉例而言,該多區可著色窗可具有一單片電致變色裝置,其中在該窗之底部部分處具有一或多個著色區且在頂部處具有一採光透明基板條帶。 在此眩光組態之另一實例中及可能在用於其他目的之其他組態中,根據一實施例,一多區可著色窗包括一或多個著色區,可控制該一或多個著色區以使之具有自一側至相對側之著色梯度。在一種情況中,頂部著色區具有在一側以脫色著色狀態開始且著色朝相對側增加之著色梯度。亦即,不會如實體上分開之區中般存在著色之突然改變,在實體上分開之區中,區之間的高對比可能會使終端使用者分心且對終端使用者無吸引力。 4為根據一實施例的具有一多區可著色窗 460之此實例的示意圖,該多區可著色窗具有一著色梯度。多區可著色窗 460位於建築物之內部與外部之間、房間 450之外部垂直牆壁中。多區可著色窗 460包括在窗 450之頂部處的第一著色區 462及在第一著色區 462下方之第二著色區 464。在所繪示圖示中,第一著色區 462處於第一著色狀態,該第一著色狀態為最亮之著色狀態(例如,脫色狀態),且第二著色區 464處於比該第一著色狀態暗之第二著色狀態。就所示之著色而言,第一著色區 462允許來自高空之太陽的自然光進入房間中同時防止來自投射至具有桌子及坐著之佔用者的所示佔用區域上之直射太陽光的眩光。穿過第一著色區 462之直射太陽光將眩光投射(藉由箭頭繪示)至房間後部之未佔用區域上。在此特定實例中,多區可著色窗 460亦具有著色梯度區域 466,該著色梯度區域包括具有一寬度之電阻區域。著色梯度區域 466具有在相鄰之第一著色區 462與第二著色區 464之著色狀態之間的一著色梯度。亦即,可量測著色梯度距離(或寬度),例如,自%T開始變化之一個區的開頭,經過且包括朝相鄰區中%T之變化、在該第二區之%T變成恆定之處結束。在一個態樣中,該梯度部分之寬度為約10”。在另一態樣中,該梯度部分之寬度係在2”至15”之範圍中。在另一態樣中,該梯度部分之寬度係在10”至15”之範圍中。在一個態樣中,該梯度部分之寬度為約5”。在一個態樣中,該梯度部分之寬度為約2”。在一個態樣中,該梯度部分之寬度為約15”。在一個態樣中,該梯度部分之寬度為約20”。在一個態樣中,該梯度部分之寬度為約20”。在一個態樣中,該梯度部分之寬度為至少約10”。在一個態樣中,該梯度部分之寬度為至少約16”。在一個態樣中,該梯度部分之寬度覆蓋該多區可著色窗之整個寬度或大致整個寬度。在此種情況中,該窗可具有跨過整個窗自亮至暗之連續梯度。在另一態樣中,該梯度部分之寬度小於5吋。 - 較亮著色之中間區域 雖然在眩光減少組態中可著色窗之著色的某些實例已將頂部區域或下部區域置於較亮之著色狀態,但其他實例可使頂部或下部區域變暗以控制眩光同時使頂部區域與底部區域之間的一或多個中間區域變清透或將其置於較亮之著色狀態。在此種情況中,可控制一多區可著色窗或一組可著色窗,使得一或多個著色區/窗之中間區域比其他區域亮。舉例而言,位於房間中之極低或極高處之多區可著色窗可具有使一中間區或多個中間區變清透或將其置於較亮之著色狀態的著色組態。作為另一實例,跨過多個樓層(例如,單個房間中之開放夾層或閣樓)之單個多區可著色窗可具有使一中間區或多個中間區變清透之著色組態。作為另一實例,控制垂直牆壁之中間區域中的一或多個可著色窗使之著色成比垂直牆壁中之其他可著色窗亮。 5為根據一態樣的具有三個可著色窗 502504506之房間 550的示意圖。該房間具有有兩張桌子之第二夾層樓及有單張桌子之下層樓。可著色窗 502504506垂直地佈置且位於建築物之內部與外部之間、在房間 550之外部垂直牆壁中。在此圖示中,中間可著色窗 504處於第一著色狀態(例如,脫色狀態),且其他可著色窗 502506處於比第一著色狀態暗之第二著色狀態。就所示著色而言,中間可著色窗 504允許來自太陽之自然光進入房間 550中在佔用區域之間的地方以減少照明/加熱負荷。此著色亦防止來自投射至夾層樓及下層樓上之佔用區域上的直射太陽光之眩光。 雖然眩光減少組態中之多區可著色窗的許多實例在本文中係相對於沿著窗之長度佈置的多個全寬度著色區來進行闡述,但其他實例可包括沿著窗之寬度佈置的全長度著色區。或者,預計到,一多區可著色窗可包括與窗之長度及寬度上之位置的二維陣列對應之矩形著色區(數位化設計)。 b) 具有多個窗片之窗 在某些實施方案中,一可著色窗包括呈(例如)隔熱玻璃單元(IGU)之形式的多個窗片,該IGU具有密封於窗片之間的間隔件。另一實例為積層構造。本文中相對於所示實例示出及闡述之任何著色組態可用於IGU或積層構造之單個窗片或一或多個窗片。 在一個眩光減少著色組態中,一可著色窗包括與一第二配對窗片組合之第一可著色窗片,該第二配對窗片具有多個著色區或單個著色區。在此著色組態中,穿過多個窗片之光的組合透射率可用於提供比單個窗片低之透射率。舉例而言,穿過其中兩個窗片著色至最暗著色狀態之區域中的兩個可著色窗片的減小之透射率等級可為1% T以下。穿過組合之多個已著色窗片之區域的此減小之透射率可用於在多區可著色窗中提供增加之眩光控制。亦即,低於1%之透射率可為某些終端使用者所要的,例如,以進一步減少眩光。在此等情況中,可在需要時使用具有多個窗片之可著色窗來減少低於1%之透射率。 在此著色組態之一個實施方案中,一多區可著色窗呈具有多個窗片之IGU的形式,每一窗片具有可著色以減少眩光之一或多個著色區。在一年/一天中之某些時間,該窗之上部區域之著色為適當的,因為太陽處於某一高度使得穿過該上部區域之太陽光為穿過接收太陽光之窗之所有部分的眩光之主要原因。在其他情況中,該多區可著色窗之其他區域亦可得益於此著色。舉例而言,下部部分可能亦得益於此著色。 根據一個態樣,一多區窗中藉由控制方法判定為最適合於著色以減少眩光之區域為佔用者不具有良好之視覺潛力的彼等區域。換言之,當佔用者位於其在房間中通常所處之位置時,若其可看到窗戶外面,例如,以查看天氣狀況,則為所要的。在一個實例中,該控制方法判定將某些著色區之著色狀態保持於或轉變至較暗之著色狀態以控制佔用區域上之眩光,只要該等已著色區之區域不會阻擋佔用者之視野。 在某些實施方案中,控制呈IGU形式之多區可著色窗使之具有使眩光控制與減少之能量消耗平衡的著色狀態。在一種情況中,該IGU之配對窗片可具有被設計成總是或幾乎總是減少眩光之一或多個著色區。雖然配對窗片一般係指IGU之任何基板,但在一種情況中,配對窗片為IGU的上面無光學可切換裝置(例如,電致變色裝置)之基板。 c) 太陽光之方向控制 在一個態樣中,IGU中之配對窗片或可能一些其他結構可被設計成在水平方向上引導太陽光,而不管太陽相對於窗位置之相對高度如何。用於在水平方向上引導光之機構可包括在IGU內部或IGU外部中或與配對窗片相關聯之一組極細之板條或百葉窗結構。在一個實例中,小機械百葉窗可建置於配對窗片之電可控區域中以對光重定向。作為另一實例,一連串光管可駐留於IGU外部或內部(窗片之間的區域)以在實質上水平之方向上引導太陽光。 6為根據一實施例的在房間 699之垂直牆壁中的呈IGU之形式的多區可著色窗 690之實例的示意圖。該IGU包括內EC窗片與外EC窗片及在該等窗片之間的間隔件(未圖示)。內EC窗片包括第一著色區 693、第二著色區 696及第三著色區 697。外EC窗片包括第一著色區 694及第二著色區 698。在窗 690之頂部部分 692中,該等窗片之間的區域 695具有一連串光管,該等光管包括用於傳送光之反射內表面。在其他實施例中,區域 695可包括光散射元件、反射器、擴散器、微型遮蔽件(或類似MEMS裝置)或類似者。在此著色組態中,使著色區 693694變清透以允許太陽光透射,同時對光進行引導或防止光照射於佔用者身上且因此避免眩光情形,同時仍允許自然光進入該空間中。在此組態中,太陽光穿過在頂部部分 692處之外EC窗片之外表面處的著色區 694、傳送通過該等光管,且傳輸通過處於清透狀態之內EC窗片的著色區 693。在一些情況中,如所繪示,光可被稍稍引導至房間之後部。就所示之著色組態而言,窗 690之頂部部分 692允許來自高空位置之太陽的自然光進入房間同時防止來自具有桌子及佔用者之佔用區域上之直射太陽光的眩光。 在另一實施方案中,IGU之一或多個窗片可具有有擴散光源之區域,使得照射於此區域上之光擴散或散射以便消除佔用區域上之潛在眩光。可藉由將擴散膜或光引導膜施加至該區域來達成擴散或散射。此等膜含有許多散射中心或其他通路以允許光進入但同時減少佔用區域上之直射光線。 d) 具有非 EC 膜之多區窗 在某些實施方案中,可著色窗包括電致變色裝置或其他光學可切換裝置。在一個實施方案中,該可著色窗包括光學可切換裝置及光伏膜。在另一實施方案中,可著色窗包括光學可切換裝置及熱致變色材料層及/或光致變色材料層。對具有熱致變色或光致變色材料之可著色窗的一些闡述可見於標題為「MULTI-PANE DYNAMIC WINDOW AND METHOD FOR MAKING SAME」且在2008年6月25日提交之美國專利申請案第12/145,892號(現為美國專利第8,514,476號)中,該申請案特此以引用方式整體地併入。 e) 採光著色組態之其他實例 某些態樣係關於具有保持於脫色著色狀態之至少一個著色區或可著色窗(採光著色區/窗)之著色組態。採光著色區/窗允許自然光進入房間中同時藉由使其他著色區/窗著色來控制房間中之眩光/溫度。此等態樣係針對來自佔用者/建築物之動機。第一,採光著色區/窗可增加房間光照。亦即,較暗之著色狀態可能會讓佔用者感覺房間過暗。佔用者可能想要讓更多光進入房間中,同時在太陽照射在立面上時仍控制眩光。第二,採光著色區/窗可改良房間之光顏色。亦即,較暗之著色狀態可使房間中之光看起來為有色的(例如,藍色)。佔用者可能想要維持更自然之房間顏色,同時進行著色以控制眩光。第三,採光著色區/窗可改良透過窗之視覺及佔用者與外界之聯繫。佔用者可能想要在窗處於較暗著色狀態時識別當前天氣或其他戶外條件。第四,採光著色區/窗可維持眩光/熱量控制。亦即,其他著色區/窗將著色以保護佔用者不受眩光影響且防止來自太陽輻射之熱量。 在某些態樣中,多區窗之採光著色區之寬度足以允許足夠之自然光進入房間中以減少房間中之光顏色(例如,藍色)同時仍提供眩光/加熱控制。在一個態樣中,採光著色區之寬度為約5”。在另一態樣中,採光著色區之寬度小於22”。在另一態樣中,採光著色區之寬度係在約10”與21”之間。在一個態樣中,採光著色區之寬度為約15”。 7示出根據採光著色組態之態樣的具有第一多區可著色窗 712之左側房間 710及具有第二多區可著色窗 732之右側房間 730。左側之房間 710中之第一多區可著色窗 712具有在窗台水平面以上之兩個著色區。右側之房間 730中之第二多區可著色窗 732具有在窗台水平面以上之三個著色區。在第一多區可著色窗 712與第二多區可著色窗 732中,在窗台水平面以下之下部部分為不可著色的。在一種情況中,該下部部分可為不具有光學可切換裝置之透明基板。在兩個房間 710730中,頂部著色區如圖所示處於清透狀態以允許日光穿過該著色區進入房間中,此與 3中所示之橫框窗實例類似。具有兩個著色區之第一多區可著色窗 712可具有比三區窗低之製造及設計複雜性。 8A包括根據說明採光著色組態之一實施例的在房間 800中具有若干可著色多區窗的模型化建築物之平面圖及側視(南立面)圖。 8B包括圖 8A中所示之模型化建築物之房間 800的透視圖。每一多區窗具有兩個著色區,第一頂部著色區及第二中間著色區。下部區域為不具有光學可切換裝置之透明基板。在所示實例中,上部著色區處於比中間著色區亮之狀態以允許日光穿過上部著色區進入房間中。 9為根據一實施例的在6月21日、9月21日及12月21日來自穿過 7中所示之多區窗的太陽光在房間之第1排及第2排座位處之日光眩光機率(DGP)的圖。該多區窗具有兩個著色區。 10為相對於 9所闡述之房間中的兩個著色區的在6月21日、9月21日及12月21日以呎燭光(FC)計的在桌子水平面處之室內亮度級的圖。 11 7中所示之兩區可著色窗之著色排程的圖,該圖包括照度級及DGP值。如所示,自一時間段,向著色區提供足夠之眩光控制及採光。在年末一天之中午需要最暗著色狀態(著色4)。 12為具有兩個區及具有三個區之多區窗的著色排程之圖。與兩個區相比,三個區提供更多著色選擇。下部視覺僅可有時著色以稍降低眩光但不會影響亮度級。 13示出具有多區可著色窗之房間的兩個視圖之模擬的圖示,該等多區可著色窗具有寬度為15”之採光著色區。 14示出具有寬度為5”之採光著色區之模擬房間中的綠色-藍色賦色及亮度的圖。採光區之寬度的第一個5”造成了房間顏色之最大增量差異。一個實施例為向在房間空間與房間外部之間具有可著色窗之房間提供採光的方法,該方法包括允許未著色窗長度之至少5”在該可著色窗之長度的其餘部分著色時允許少於5%之太陽光譜從中透射穿過。 III. 控制器 在一些實施例中,一或多個控制器可向建築物系統供電或發送其他控制信號來控制該等建築物系統之功能。在一些情況中,舉例而言,控制器可對可著色窗之一或多個電致變色裝置供電。本文中闡述之控制器不限於具有對一個(或多個)裝置供電之功能的彼等控制器,為了進行控制,該等控制器與該(等)裝置相關聯。亦即,電源可與該控制器分開,其中該控制器具有其自己之電源且指導來自獨立電源之電力向該(等)裝置之施加。然而,將電源與該控制器一起包括且對控制器進行組態以直接對裝置供電為方便的,因為免於需要用於對裝置供電之單獨接線。 在一些情況中,一控制器為獨立控制器,該獨立控制器經組態以控制單個系統(諸如電致變色窗或電致變色窗區之一或多個電致變色裝置)之功能,而無需將該控制器整合至建築物控制網路或建築物管理系統(BMS)中。在其他情況中,如本小節中進一步闡述,該控制器整合至建築物控制網路或BMS中。 A. 控制器組件之實例 15繪示控制器 1550之一些組件及藉由控制器 1550控制的建築物系統之裝置 1500的簡化方塊圖。被實施來控制光學可切換裝置之類似控制器組件的更多詳情可見於均在2012年4月17日提交之標題為為「CONTROLLER FOR OPTICALLY-SWITCHABLE WINDOWS」的美國專利申請案13/449,248及13/449,251中以及在2012年4月17日提交之標題為為「CONTROLLING TRANSITIONS IN OPTICALLY SWITCHABLE DEVICES」的美國專利申請案13/449,235 (公佈為美國專利第8,705,162號)中;以上所有申請案特此以引用方式整體併入。 在 15中,控制器 1550之所示組件包括微處理器 1555或其他處理器、脈寬調變器 1560(PWM)、信號調節模組 1565及具有組態檔案 1575之電腦可讀媒體(例如,記憶體) 1570。控制器 1550經由網路 1580(有線或無線)與一或多個裝置 1500電子通信以向該一或多個裝置 1500發送控制指令。在一些實施例中,控制器 1550可為經由網路(有線或無線)與主控制器通信之局部控制器。 在一些實施例中,來自感測器之輸出可輸入至信號調節模組 1565。該輸入可呈傳至信號調節模組1 565之電壓信號的形式。信號調節模組 1565將輸出信號傳遞至微處理器 1555或其他處理器。微處理器 1555或其他處理器基於各種資料,諸如來自組態檔案 1575之資訊、來自信號調節模組 1565之輸出、超控值或其他資料,來判定該(等)裝置之控制等級。微處理器 1555接著向PWM 1560發送指令以經由網路 1580向建築物系統之一或多個裝置施加電壓及/或電流來控制其功能。 在一個實例中,微處理器 1555可指示PWM 1560向窗之電致變色裝置施加電壓及/或電流以使其轉變至四個或更多個不同著色狀態中之任一者。在一種情況中,該電致變色裝置可轉變至闡述為以下各者之至少八個不同著色等級:0 (最亮)、5、10、15、20、25、30及35(最暗)。該等著色等級可與透射穿過電致變色窗之光的視覺透射率值及太陽得熱係數(SHGC)值線性對應。舉例而言,使用以上八個著色等級,最亮著色等級0可對應於SHGC值0.80,著色等級5可對應於SHGC值0.70,著色等級10可對應於SHGC值0.60,著色等級15可對應於SHGC值0.50,著色等級20可對應於SHGC值0.40,著色等級25可對應於SHGC值0.30,著色等級30可對應於SHGC值0.20,且著色等級35 (最暗)可對應於SHGC值0.10。如將在下文中討論,透射穿過已著色窗之光可在房間中賦予顏色。顏色之深度將視著色等級而定。 在一些情況中,該控制器控制一或多個可著色窗,諸如電致變色窗。在一種情況中,電致變色窗之電致變色裝置中之至少一者或全部為固態及無機之電致變色裝置。在一種情況中,電致變色窗為如在2010年8月5日提交且標題為「Multipane Electrochromic Windows」之美國專利申請案序列號12/851,514 (現為美國專利第8,705,162號)中闡述的多態電致變色窗,該申請案特此以引用方式整體併入。 控制器 1550或與控制器 1550通信之主控制器可採用控制邏輯來基於各種資料判定控制等級。控制器 1550可指示PWM 1560基於所判定之控制等級來向一或多個裝置施加電壓及/或電流或否則發送控制信號。 B. 建築物管理系統 (BMS) 本文中闡述之控制器適合於與建築物管理系統(BMS)整合。BMS為安裝於建築物中的監測及控制建築物之機械設備及電氣設備的基於電腦之控制系統,諸如加熱、通風及空氣調節系統(亦被稱作「HVAC系統」)、照明系統、電力系統(例如,無線電力系統)、窗系統(諸如可著色窗之一或多個區)、輸送系統(諸如電梯系統)、應急系統(諸如消防系統)、安全系統及其他建築物系統。BMS由硬體(包括藉由通信通道連至一或多個電腦之互連件)及用於根據由佔用者及/或由建築物管理者設定之偏好來維持建築物中之條件的相關聯軟體組成。舉例而言,可使用區域網路(諸如乙太網)來實施BMS。該軟體可基於(例如)網際網路協定及/或開放標準。一個實例為來自Tridium, Inc.(位於Richmond, Virginia)之軟體。通常用於BMS之一種通信協定為BACnet (建築物自動化及控制網路)。 BMS在大型建築物中最常見,且通常至少用於控制建築物內之環境條件。舉例而言,BMS可控制建築物內之溫度、亮度級、色溫、對比率、聲級或其他聲品質、空氣品質(諸如二氧化碳含量及/或顆粒物含量)、濕度等級及其他條件。通常,有許多機械裝置藉由BMS控制,諸如加熱器、空氣調節器、鼓風機、通風孔及類似者。為了控制建築物環境,BMS可開啟及關閉或以其他方式將建築物系統中之此等裝置控制為特定等級。典型之現代BMS的核心功能係為建築物之佔用者維持舒適之環境(例如,視覺舒適性、熱舒適性、聲舒適性、空氣品質等)同時最小化能量成本/需求。因此,現代BMS不僅用於監測及控制,且亦用於最佳化各種系統之間的配合,例如,以節約能量及降低建築物運營成本。 16繪示BMS 1600之一實施例的示意圖,該BMS與建築物 1601之許多系統通信(無線或有線)且管理該等系統,該等系統包括安全系統 1632、加熱/通風/空氣調節(HVAC)系統 1634、照明系統 1636、電力系統 1642、電梯或其他輸送系統 1644、消防或其他應急系統 1645、與可著色窗相關聯之窗系統 1650及類似者。安全系統 1632可包括磁卡存取、旋轉柵門、螺線管驅動之門鎖、監控攝影機及其他資產或佔用者定位裝置、防盜自動警鈴、金屬偵測器及類似者。消防或其他應急系統 1645可包括警報及包括水管道控制之滅火系統。照明系統 1636可包括內部照明、外部照明、緊急警報燈、緊急出口標誌及緊急樓層疏散照明。電力系統 1642可包括主電源、備用發電機、不斷電供應系統(UPS)電網、電力產生系統(諸如光伏電力系統)及類似者。在其他實施例中,BMS可管理建築物系統之其他組合。 在 16中示出之所示實例中,BMS 1600藉由向主窗控制器 3202發送控制信號來控制窗系統 1650。在此實例中,主窗控制器 3202被繪示為控制器之分散式網路,該分散式網路包括主網路控制器 1603、中間網路控制器 1605a1605b及端或葉控制器 1610。端或葉控制器 1610可類似於相對於 15所闡述之窗控制器 1550、相對於 19所闡述之窗控制器 1940或相對於 20所闡述之窗控制器 790。在一個實例中,主網路控制器 1603可接近於BMS 1600,且建築物 1601之每一樓層或其他區域可具有中間網路控制器 1605a1605b中之一者,而每一可著色窗或可著色窗之區具有其自己之端控制器 1610 在此實例中,端或葉控制器 1610中之每一者控制建築物 1601之特定可著色窗或可著色窗之特定區 端或葉控制器 1610中之每一者可處於與其控制之可著色窗分開的位置,或可整合至該可著色窗中。為簡單起見,僅將建築物 1601之十個可著色窗繪示為藉由主窗控制器 3202控制。在典型情形中,建築物中可能有較大數目之可著色窗藉由主窗控制器 3202控制。主窗控制器 3202無需為窗控制器之分散式網路。舉例而言,如上文所闡述,控制單個可著色窗或可著色窗之單個區之功能的單個端控制器亦落入本文中揭示之實施例的範疇內。 在一個態樣中,BMS或另一控制器經由通信網路自建築物處之一或多個感測器接收感測器資料。對於外部感測器,建築物可包括在建築物之屋頂上之外部感測器。或者,建築物可包括與每一外部窗相關聯之外部感測器或在建築物之每一側上的外部感測器。在建築物之每一側上的外部感測器可隨著太陽在一天中改變位置而追蹤建築物之側上的輻照度。作為另一實例,具有多個感測器(諸如光感測器、紅外線感測器、環境溫度感測器及其他感測器)之多感測器裝置可位於建築物處,例如,在屋頂上。另外地或另選地,BMS可自其他建築物系統接收回饋資料。在一種情況中,BMS可接收關於佔用者在建築物中之存在及位置的資料。藉由合併來自各種建築物系統之資料,BMS可提供(例如)增強的:1)環境控制、2)能量節省、3)安全性、4)控制選擇之靈活性、5)歸因於對其他系統之較少依賴且因此對其他系統之較少維護而使其他系統之可靠性及可用壽命提高、6) 資訊可用性及診斷、7)人員之有效利用及來自人員之較高生產力,及此等情況之各種組合,因為可自動地控制該等系統。 建築物系統有時可根據每日、每月、每季度或每年之排程來運作。舉例而言,照明控制系統、窗系統、HVAC及安全系統可考慮到人們在工作日期間何時處於建築物中而按照24小時排程來操作。在晚上,建築物可進入能量節省模式,且在白天,系統可以最小化建築物之能量消耗同時為佔用者提供舒適性的方式來操作。作為另一實例,該等系統在假期內可關掉或進入能量節省模式。排程資訊可與地理資訊組合。地理資訊可包括建築物之緯度及經度。地理資訊亦可包括關於建築物之每一側面向之方向的資訊。使用此類資訊,可以不同方式來控制在建築物之不同側的不同房間。 17為根據實施例的用於控制建築物(例如, 16中所示之建築物 1601)之一或多個可著色窗的電致變色裝置 1701之功能(例如,轉變至不同著色等級)的系統 1700之組件的方塊圖。系統 1700可為藉由BMS (例如, 16中所示之BMS 1600)管理的建築物系統中之一者或可獨立於BMS來操作。系統 1700包括主窗控制器 1703,該主窗控制器可向該一或多個可著色窗發送控制信號以控制其功能。系統 1700亦包括與主窗控制器 1703電子通信之網路 1740。可經由網路 1740向主窗控制器 1703傳送用於控制可著色窗之功能的該控制邏輯、其他控制邏輯及指令及/或感測器及其他資料。網路 1740可為有線或無線網路(例如,雲端網路)。在一個實施例中,網路 1740可與BMS通信以允許BMS經由網路 1740向建築物中之可著色窗發送用於控制可著色窗之指令。 系統 1700亦包括該一或多個可著色窗(未圖示)之EC裝置 1701及可選之壁開關 1790,該等EC裝置與壁開關與主窗控制器 1703電子通信。在此所示實例中,主窗控制器 1703可向EC裝置 1701發送控制信號以控制具有EC裝置 1701之可著色窗的著色等級。每一壁開關 1790亦與EC裝置 1701及主窗控制器 1703通信。終端使用者(例如,具有可著色窗之房間的佔用者)可使用壁開關 1790來控制具有EC裝置 1701之可著色窗的著色等級及其他功能。 在 17中,主窗控制器 1703被繪示為窗控制器之分散式網路,該分散式網路包括主網路控制器 1703、與主網路控制器 1703通信之複數個中間網路控制器 1705及多個複數個端或葉窗控制器 1710。每複數個端或葉窗控制器 1710與單個中間網路控制器 1705通信。雖然主窗控制器 1703被示出為窗控制器之分散式網路,但在其他實施例中,主窗控制器 1703亦可為控制單個可著色窗之功能的單個窗控制器。 17中之系統 1700的組件在某些方面可類似於相對於 16所闡述之組件。舉例而言,主網路控制器 1703可類似於主網路控制器 1303,且中間網路控制器 1705可類似於中間網路控制器 1705 17中之分散式網路中的每一窗控制器可包括處理器(例如,微處理器)及與該處理器電通信之電腦可讀媒體。 在 17中,每一葉或端窗控制器 1710與單個可著色窗之EC裝置 1701通信以控制建築物中之彼可著色窗的著色等級。在IGU之情況中,葉或端窗控制器 1710可與IGU之多個窗片上的EC裝置 1701通信以控制該IGU之著色等級。在其他實施例中,每一葉或端窗控制器 1710可與(例如)窗之區中的複數個可著色窗通信。葉或端窗控制器 1710可整合至可著色窗中或可與其控制之可著色窗分開。 17中之葉及端窗控制器 1710可類似於 16中之端或葉控制器 1610。 每一壁開關 1790可由終端使用者(例如,房間之佔用者)操作以控制與壁開關 1790通信之可著色窗的著色等級及其他功能。終端使用者可操作壁開關 1790以向相關聯可著色窗中之EC裝置 1701傳送控制信號。在一些情況中,來自壁開關 1790之此等信號可超控來自主窗控制器 1703之信號。在其他情況(例如,高需求情況)中,來自主窗控制器 1703之控制信號可超控來自壁開關 1790之控制信號。每一壁開關 1790亦與葉或端窗控制器 1710通信以將關於自壁開關 1790發送之控制信號(例如,時間、日期、所請求之著色等級等)的資訊發回主窗控制器 1703。在一些情況中,可手動操作壁開關 1790。在其他情況中,可由終端使用者使用遠端裝置(例如,行動電話、平板電腦等)發送具有控制信號之無線通信(例如,使用紅外線(IR)及/或射頻(RF)信號)來無線地控制壁開關 1790。在一些情況中,壁開關 1790可包括無線協定晶片,諸如藍芽、EnOcean、WiFi、Zigbee及類似者。雖然 17中繪示之壁開關 1790位於牆壁上,但系統 1700之其他實施例可具有位於房間中別處之開關。系統 1700亦包括多感測器裝置 1712,該多感測器裝置經由通信網路 1740與一或多個控制器電子通信,以便向該(等)控制器傳送感測器讀數及/或經篩選之感測器值。 18繪示用於建築物之建築物網路 1800之實施例的方塊圖。如上文所指出,建築物網路 1800可採用任何數目之不同通信協定,包括BACnet。如所示,建築物網路 1800包括主網路控制器 1805、照明控制面板 1810、BMS 1815、安全控制系統 1820及使用者控制台 1825。建築物中之此等不同控制器及系統可用於接收來自建築物之HVAC系統 1830、燈 1835、安全感測器 1840、門鎖 1845、攝影機 1850及可著色窗 1855之輸入及/或控制HVAC系統 1830、燈 1835、安全感測器 1840、門鎖 1845、攝影機 1850及可著色窗 1855。 主網路控制器 1805可以與相對於圖17所闡述之主網路控制器 3403類似之方式起作用。照明控制面板 1810可包括用於控制內部照明、外部照明、緊急警報燈、緊急出口標誌及緊急樓層疏散照明之電路。照明控制面板 1810亦可包括在建築物之房間中的佔用感測器。BMS 1815可包括電腦伺服器,該電腦伺服器自網路 1800之其他系統及控制器接收資料及向網路 1800之其他系統及控制器發出命令。舉例而言,BMS 1815可自主網路控制器 1805、照明控制面板 1810及安全控制系統 1820中之每一者接收資料且向主網路控制器 1805、照明控制面板 1810及安全控制系統 1820中之每一者發出命令。安全控制系統 1820可包括磁卡存取、旋轉柵門、螺線管驅動之門鎖、監控攝影機、防盜自動警鈴、金屬偵測器及類似者。使用者控制台 1825可為可由建築物管理者用於為對建築物之不同系統進行之控制、監測、最佳化及排除故障操作進行排程的電腦終端。來自Tridium, Inc.之軟體可產生來自用於使用者控制台 1225之不同系統的資料之視覺表示。 該等不同控制中之每一者可控制不同類型之裝置/設備。主網路控制器 1805控制窗 1855。照明控制面板 1810控制燈 1835。BMS 1815可控制HVAC 1830。安全控制系統 1820控制安全感測器 1840、門鎖 1845及攝影機 1850。可在作為建築物網路 1800之部分的所有不同裝置/設備及控制器之間交換及/或共用資料。 C. 用於獨立控制多個著色區之窗控制器的實例 在某些態樣中,可使用單個窗控制器或多個窗控制器來獨立地控制一多區可著色窗之單個電致變色裝置的多個區或一區中之多個可著色窗。在第一設計中,單個窗控制器與多個電壓調整器電通信。在第二設計中,主窗控制器與多個子控制器電通信。在一些情況中,每一多區可著色窗包括一記憶體、晶片或卡,該記憶體、晶片或卡儲存關於窗之資訊,該資訊包括實體特性、生產資訊(日期、地點、製作參數、批號等)及類似者。該記憶體、晶片或卡可為機載窗控制器之部分或並非機載窗控制器之部分,例如,在與窗控制器連接之線束、尾纖及/或連接器中。在本文中闡述控制多區可著色窗之窗控制器,不管是在窗上還是作為窗之部分。在標題為「MULTIPURPOSE CONTROLLER FOR MULTISTATE WINDOWS」且在2011年3月16日提交之美國專利申請案13/049,756及標題為「SELF-CONTAINED EC IGU」且在2015年11月24日提交之美國專利申請案14/951,410中闡述可包括於記憶體中之其他資訊,該兩件申請案出於所有目的以引用方式併入本文中。 - 控制器設計 1 如上文所提及,根據第一設計,一窗控制器連接至其控制之多個電壓調整器。每一電壓調整器與著色區中之一者電通信。在一個實施例中,該等電壓調整器為機載的,亦即,為窗總成之部分,例如,在隔熱玻璃單元之二次密封中。該等電壓調整器可與控制器實體上分開,或為控制器之部分,不管該控制器是機載的還是與窗分開。窗控制器與每一電壓調整器電通信以能夠獨立地指示每一電壓調整器向其自己之著色區遞送電壓。每一電壓調整器向特定著色區中之兩個匯流條中之僅一者遞送電流。此設計涉及多個電壓調整器,每一著色區一個電壓調整器,且所有電壓調整器經由通信匯流排(未繪示)共同藉由單個窗控制器控制。 19為根據此第一設計的具有連接至五(5)個電壓調整器 1945之窗控制器 1940的控制系統之示意圖。每一電壓調整器 1945電連接至窗 1950之對應著色區 1952之匯流條中的一者且電連接至窗控制器 1940。在此實例中,窗控制器 1940指示每一電壓調整器 1945獨立地向其自己之著色區 1952遞送電壓。每一電壓調整器 1945向其著色區 1952上之兩個匯流條中之僅一者遞送電流。以此方式,每一區 1952可相對於其他區 1952獨立地著色。 此第一設計之另一結構特徵為該等電壓調整器中之每一者係針對或連接至該多區電致變色裝置之各別區中的匯流條中之僅一者。該等區中與電壓經調整之匯流條相反的匯流條全部自窗控制器接收相同電壓。若該等著色區中之一者需要以與其他區相反之方向驅動,則此提出挑戰,因為若施加至其他區之電壓與此類反轉後極性不一致,則兩個匯流條上之極性不可反轉。 在此種設計中,每一電壓調整器為簡單設計,該設計具有用於按窗控制器指示施加電壓之邏輯(例如,儲存於記憶體上且被擷取來藉由處理器執行之指令)。局部窗控制器包括具有用於實施規則之指令的邏輯,該等指令包括:1)與較高級之窗控制器通信,2)在必要時減少電力,3)及判定將向個別著色區中之每一者施加之實際電壓。作為與較高級窗控制器通信之一實例,局部窗控制器可接收用於將個別區中之每一者置於各別著色狀態的指令。該窗控制器接著可解譯此資訊且決定如何藉由施加適當驅動電壓、保持時間、斜坡曲線、保持電壓等來驅動轉變而最好地達成此結果。在2012年4月17日提交且標題為「CONTROLLER FOR OPTICALLY-SWITCHABLE WINDOWS」之美國專利申請案13/449,248中及在2012年4月17日提交且標題為「CONTROLLER FOR OPTICALLY-SWITCHABLE WINDOWS」之美國專利申請案13/449,251中闡述用於驅動光學可切換窗中之轉變的控制指令之詳情,該兩件申請案特此以引用方式整體併入。 - 控制器設計 2 在第二設計中,使用單獨之子控制器來控制著色區中之每一者。在此種設計中,該等子控制器自主窗控制器接收總體著色指令。舉例而言,主(上級)窗控制器可向子控制器發送具有著色指令之信號以驅動特定著色區轉變至新著色狀態。該子控制器包括記憶體,該記憶體包括用於驅動轉變之控制指令,該等控制指令包括判定驅動轉變所需之適當驅動電壓、保持時間、斜坡曲線等之指令。用於多區窗之主窗控制器與控制網路上之較高級控制實體通信,主窗控制器亦用於將來自電源之電力降至適於子控制器執行其功能之適當程度。 在此種設計中,每一子控制器具有引至其負責之各別著色區之每一匯流條的引線。以此方式,可獨立地控制用於每一區之一對匯流條上的極性。若著色區中之一者需要以與其他區之極性相反的極性來驅動,則藉由此設計,可反轉該兩個匯流條上之極性。此為相較於第一設計之優點,因為每一區可獨立地著色或變清透。 20為根據此第二設計的連接至五個子控制器(SWC) 2070之單個窗控制器的示意圖。每一子控制器 2070具有引至對應著色區 2062之匯流條的兩個引線。在此實例中,SWC 2070與連接至主窗控制器 2080之一連串SWC 2070之末端處的一個SWC 2070串聯地電連接。在此實例中,窗控制器 2080向子控制器 2070發送具有著色指令之信號以驅動其相關聯之著色區 2062的轉變。 D. 光伏電力 在某些實施方案中,一可著色窗(例如,電致變色窗)包括光伏(PV)膜或其他光採集裝置。該光採集裝置採集能量,轉換太陽能以向窗控制器及/或其他窗裝置提供電力或供儲存於電池中。 E. 機載窗控制器 在一些態樣中,一可著色窗具有在該窗上之窗控制器。在2015年11月24日提交之標題為為「SELF-CONTAINTED EC IGU」的美國專利申請案第14/951,410號中闡述機載窗控制器之實例的詳情,該申請案特此以引用方式整體併入。 F. 無線供電 根據一個態樣,可(例如)經由射頻、磁感應、雷射、微波能等來無線地對多區窗供電。關於無線供電窗之組件的詳情可見於在2017年9月21日提交之標題為為「WIRELESS POWERED ELECTROCHROMIC WINDOWS」的國際PCT申請案PCT/US17/52798中,該申請案特此以引用方式整體併入。 在一個態樣中,一多區可著色窗包括射頻(RF)天線,該射頻天線將RF能轉換成用於對該多區可著色窗中之一或多個著色區之轉變供電的電位。該RF天線可位於該多區窗之框架中或位於另一結構(例如,隔熱玻璃單元之間隔件)中。舉例而言,RF天線可位於具有多個窗片之隔熱玻璃單元之間隔件中,其中至少一個窗片包括多區電致變色裝置。RF天線自RF發射器接收RF信號。在一種情況中,RF發射器向多個RF天線提供RF信號。在標題為「WINDOW ANTENNAS」且在2015年11月24日提交之PCT申請案PCT/US15/62387中闡述關於天線之實例的詳情,該申請案特此以引用方式整體併入。 IV. 用於控制可著色窗及 / 或其他建築物系統之功能的控制邏輯 在某些實施方案中,用於判定窗之組(區)之著色決策的控制邏輯可類似於用於判定一窗中之多個著色區或一組窗中之個別窗之著色決策的控制邏輯來操作。亦即,用於多個窗之控制邏輯根據每一窗之位置及方向來判定該窗之著色狀態。用於一窗之多個區的控制邏輯將根據該窗之每一區之位置及方向來判定該區之著色狀態。用於判定多個窗之著色決策及將該等窗轉變至所判定之著色狀態的控制邏輯之實例可見於在2015年5月5日提交且標題為「CONTROL METHOD FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS」之PCT申請案PCT/US15/29675中,該申請案特此以引用方式整體併入。在某些態樣中,如本文中所闡述,此控制邏輯之某些操作可適合於判定多個著色區之著色決策且根據該等著色決策對轉變供電。 在一些態樣中,控制邏輯可適合於解決特定著色區內及/或相鄰著色區之間的著色之視覺過渡。舉例而言,該控制邏輯可包括判定某些著色狀態之邏輯,該等著色狀態在不同區中之不同著色狀態之間產生強烈對比或在區與區之間產生顏色之擴散融合(例如,使用電阻區域技術)。如上文所討論,可使用相鄰著色區之間的電阻區域(而非實體分叉)來在相鄰區之間產生著色梯度。該著色梯度一般存在於電阻區域之寬度上,且因此視覺過渡愈緩和,電阻區域之寬度愈大。該控制邏輯可適合於考慮電阻區域中之著色梯度及/或可適合於沿著著色區之匯流條的長度施加梯度電壓以在著色區(或單片EC裝置膜)內產生著色梯度。在一個實例中,匯流條可漸縮以沿著長度施加梯度電壓且產生沿長度之著色梯度。在另一態樣中,控制邏輯可適合於控制具有多個著色區之窗以判定將跨越該多個區融合顏色之著色狀態。在一個態樣中,控制邏輯可適合於控制一連串相鄰區之著色狀態,使得自需要為特別暗之區至需要為特別清透之區的轉變不會很突然。 控制邏輯之另一修改可涉及用於應用除了眩光控制、視野、自然照明、佔用者熱舒適性、建築物能量管理等常見考慮因素之外的與多區窗之額外特徵相關聯的考慮因素的單獨例程(例如,除了PCT申請案PCT/US15/29675之模組A-D之外的模組,該申請案闡述了如上文闡述之Intelligence®的態樣)。舉例而言,若光採集為動機,則可能必須要在控制邏輯上建置額外模組來解決該額外考慮因素。在一些情況中,用於解決著色區之該額外特徵或功能的功能性在用於常見考慮因素之處理管線中所處之次序可能為無關緊要的。舉例而言,Intelligence®模組未必需要在一種情況中按以下次序操作: A à B à C à D。將理解,可能的情況係,在其他情況中,該等模組之執行次序並不重要。 控制邏輯亦可經調整以考慮跨多個區之高度局部化之眩光控制。舉例而言,此情況可藉由在PCT申請案PCT/US15/29675中更詳細闡述的對控制邏輯之模組A的修改來解決。 在上文闡述了可對一或多個多區可著色窗之多個著色區之著色轉變供電的窗控制器之不同設計。在一些態樣中,一著色區可具有兩個著色狀態:第一融合著色狀態及第二變暗著色狀態。在其他態樣中,一著色區可具有四個著色狀態。在其他態樣中,一著色區可具有四個以上著色狀態。 A. 用於多個著色區 / 窗之著色控制邏輯的實例 21包括繪示根據實施例之方法 2100的流程圖,該流程圖示出了用於進行多個著色區/窗之著色決策的操作。此控制邏輯可用於判定多個窗及/或一或多個可著色窗中之多個著色區或其組合的著色決策。用於此控制邏輯之指令儲存於記憶體中且可藉由(例如)窗控制器(諸如在本文中特別係相對於 19 20示出及闡述之窗控制器)來擷取及執行。該控制邏輯包括用於如該流程圖中所示進行所示之著色決策以判定多個著色區/窗之著色等級的兩個指令。該控制邏輯亦包括用於獨立地控制該等著色區/窗以使其轉變至所判定之著色等級的指令。在某些態樣中,此控制邏輯之操作可適合於判定著色決策以實施本文中闡述之著色組態。 在操作 2110中,計算在窗之緯度及經度座標處及在特定時刻 t i 時之日期及當天時間時太陽之位置。該等緯度及經度座標可為來自組態檔案之輸入。該日期及當天時間可基於藉由計時器提供之當前時間。 在操作 2120中,計算在操作 2110中使用之特定時刻時穿過該等區/窗中之每一者透射入房間中之直射太陽光的量。基於在操作 2110中計算出之太陽位置及每一區/窗之組態來計算該太陽光量(例如,穿透深度)。區/窗組態包括多種資訊,諸如窗之位置、窗之尺寸、窗之定向(亦即,面向方向)及任何外部遮擋之詳情。該區/窗組態資訊為來自與該區/窗相關聯之組態檔案的輸入。 在操作 2130中,判定房間中之輻照度等級。在一些情況中,基於晴空條件來計算輻照度等級以判定晴空輻照度。基於來自組態檔案之窗定向且基於建築物之緯度及經度來判定晴空輻照度等級。此等計算亦可基於在操作 2110中使用之特定時刻時的當天時間及日期。公眾可獲得之軟體(諸如RADIANCE程式,其為開放原始碼程式)可提供用於判定晴空輻照度之計算。另外,輻照度等級可基於一或多個感測器讀數。舉例而言,房間中之光感測器可取判定房間中之實際輻照度的定期讀數。 在操作 2140中,控制邏輯判定房間是否被佔用。控制邏輯可基於一或多種類型之資訊來作出其決定,該等資訊包括(例如)排程資訊、佔用感測器資料、資產追蹤資訊、經由遙控器或牆壁單元(諸如 23中所示)來自使用者之啟動資料等。舉例而言,若排程資訊指示佔用者很可能在房間中,諸如在典型工作時間期間,則控制邏輯可判定房間被佔用。作為另一實例,若排程資訊指示為假期/週末,則控制邏輯可判定房間未被佔用。作為另一實例,控制邏輯可基於來自佔用感測器之讀數來判定房間被佔用。在另一實例中,若佔用者已在牆壁單元或遙控器之手動控制面板處輸入指示佔用之資訊,則控制邏輯可判定房間被佔用。在另一實例中,控制邏輯可基於自資產追蹤裝置(諸如RFID標籤)接收到之資訊來判定房間被佔用(佔用)。在此實例中,不追蹤佔用者自身。經由與佔用者之資產上的裝置或與佔用感測器一起工作之如低能耗藍牙(BLE)等系統將佔用感測器包括在房間中,控制邏輯可判定房間是否被佔用。 若在操作 2140中判定房間未被佔用,則控制邏輯為每一區/窗選擇對加熱/冷卻建築物之能量控制排定優先次序的著色等級(操作 2150)。在一些情況中,在選擇著色等級時可考慮其他因素,諸如安全性或其他安全問題。使用在操作 2140中判定之著色等級使區/窗轉變。控制邏輯接著返回至操作 211021202130,此通常係週期性地進行。 若在操作 2140中判定房間被佔用,則控制邏輯判定使用者是否已選擇模式(操作 2160)或是否基於佔用分佈圖為特定佔用者選擇模式。舉例而言,使用者(例如,佔用者或建築物運營者)可在遙控器或牆壁單元(諸如 23中所示)上之使用者介面處選擇模式。在一些情況中,GUI可具有被設計用於選擇模式之按鈕(例如,圖符),例如,採光圖符。模式之一些實例包括:作為使用者界定之模式的「採光模式」、「均一模式」、「健康模式」、「緊急模式」。舉例而言,使用者可界定具有特定著色組態之「使用者1 – 模式1」。 若在操作 2160中判定使用者已選擇了模式,則控制邏輯基於該模式為每一區/窗選擇一著色等級(操作 2170)。舉例而言,若已開啟「採光模式」,則該著色等級可基於按如下優先次序之以下因素來判定著色等級:避免眩光及允許自然光穿過採光區域進入房間中。使用在操作 2160中選擇之著色等級使區/窗轉變。控制邏輯接著返回至操作 211021202130,此通常係週期性地進行。 在一些情況中,穿過每一區/窗之太陽光的三維投射經計算為透射至房間中之直射太陽光的量及判定具有該區/窗之房間中是否存在眩光條件。在下文中相對於 24A 24B 24C來討論對光投射及基於光投射判定眩光條件之討論。 若在操作 2160中判定使用者尚未選擇模式,則控制邏輯基於按以下優先次序之因素為每一區/窗選擇一著色等級:1)眩光控制、2)能量控制及3)採光(操作 2180)。在一些情況中,亦可將其他次要因素考慮進著色等級之選擇中,該等次要因素包括以下一或多者: 用於防止快速轉變之時間延遲、演色性、著色梯度、基於歷史資料之回饋、佔用者對外部環境之觀看及光採集。舉例而言,當佔用者處於其在房間中通常所處之位置時,佔用者可能希望看到窗外,例如,以查看天氣狀況。若在進行著色決策時將佔用者對外部環境之觀看考慮在內,則控制邏輯可判定雖然特定著色區/窗之變暗著色狀態將避免眩光,但將使用較低著色等級以提供對外部環境之更清楚觀看。 在一個實施例中,計算穿過每一區/窗之太陽光的三維投射以判定透射至房間中之直射太陽光的量及判定具有該區/窗之房間中是否存在眩光條件。在下文中相對於 24A 24B 24C來討論對光投射及基於光投射判定眩光條件之討論。 在操作 2180中,為了判定適於在操作 2120中判定之眩光量的著色等級,控制邏輯可使用佔用查找表來基於與該區/窗相關聯之空間類型、在操作 2120中計算出之眩光量及該區/窗之接受角度來為該區/窗選擇適當之著色等級。空間類型及佔用查找表被提供為來自特定窗之組態檔案的輸入。佔用查找表之實例具有用於眩光量與空間類型之不同組合的不同著色等級。舉例而言,佔用查找表可具有八(8)個著色等級,包括0 (最亮)、5、10、15、20、25、30及35 (最亮)。最亮著色等級0對應於SHGC值0.80,著色等級5對應於SHGC值0.70,著色等級10對應於SHGC值0.60,著色等級15對應於SHGC值0.50,著色等級20對應於SHGC值0.40,著色等級25對應於SHGC值0.30,著色等級30對應於SHGC值0.20,且著色等級35 (最暗)對應於SHGC值0.10。在此實例中,佔用查找表具有三個空間類型:桌子1、桌子2及門廳,及六個眩光量(例如,太陽光穿過該區/窗進入房間中之穿透深度)。用於接近於窗之桌子1的著色等級高於用於遠離窗之桌子2的著色等級以在桌子較接近於窗時防止眩光。此類佔用查找表之所示實例可見於2015年5月5日提交且標題為「CONTROL METHOD FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS」之PCT/US15/29675中。 在一個實施例中,控制邏輯可基於在操作 2130中判定之輻照度等級來減小基於在操作 2120中判定之眩光量判定的著色等級。舉例而言,控制邏輯可接收輻照度之感測器讀數,該等讀數指示多雲條件存在。在此種情況中,控制邏輯可減小被判定為與眩光條件相關聯之區/窗的著色等級。 在操作 2180中,控制邏輯接著基於第二優先次序,亦即,建築物中之能量控制,來判定是否改變適合於該眩光量之所選著色等級。舉例而言,若外部溫度極高,使得冷卻負荷較高,則控制邏輯可增加一或多個區/窗中之著色等級以減少冷卻負荷。作為另一實例,若外部溫度極冷,則控制邏輯可減少一或多個區/窗中之著色等級同時在原本將會在佔用區域上造成眩光之區/窗中維持變暗著色狀態。控制邏輯接著基於第三優先次序,亦即,採光,來判定是否改變著色等級,同時考慮到建築物中之能量控制且在原本將會在佔用區域上造成眩光之區/窗中維持變暗著色狀態。使用在操作 2180中判定之著色等級使區/窗轉變。控制邏輯接著返回至操作 211021202130,此通常係週期性地進行。 B. 用於改良佔用者健康狀況之因素 根據一些態樣,控制邏輯被設計成控制可著色窗之著色及其他建築物系統之功能以藉由為特定佔用者及相關聯空間維持視覺舒適性、熱舒適性、聲舒適性、空氣品質及其他舒適性因素來改良佔用者之健康狀況。舉例而言,所討論之控制邏輯可藉由避免佔用者之位置或可能位置上的眩光、維持與佔用者之視覺舒適性相關聯的亮度級及色溫、藉由調整自然照明及/或調整窗之著色及房間中之相關聯光顏色來最小化房間中之對比率來維持視覺舒適性。在下文討論用於避免眩光之其他技術。另外地或另選地,控制邏輯可控制著色狀態之間轉變之速率。此外,某些著色組態可控制處於不同著色狀態之相鄰著色區之間的著色梯度及/或特定著色內之著色梯度。在上文討論了用於控制相鄰區之間及特定區內之著色梯度的一些組態。在上文亦討論了針對避免佔用者之位置或可能位置上之眩光、增加房間中之自然照明及/或窗之顏色及房間中之相關聯光顏色的一些組態。 1. 使用光之被動或主動操縱的眩光避免 在某些實施方案中,一多區窗包括用於對穿過窗之光進行被動或主動操縱以確保在佔用區域上無眩光及控制熱負荷同時允許持續採光進入房間中的一或多種技術。此等技術可與控制該多區窗之著色一起起作用。 在一個態樣中,該窗可具有對進入房間中之光之方向的主動或被動控制。此類技術之一些實例包括微型遮蔽件、六邊形格子、光管、IR鏡或IR反射器、吸收IR或反射IR之膜。在一個實例中,窗被設計成確保光在進入房間中時藉由使用微型遮蔽件或六邊形格子或薄膜塗層來引導成平行的。此等技術可用於允許自然光進入建築物中同時避免眩光、控制熱量及允許對光操縱、提供使用自然採光之有利演色性。在一個實例中,呈IGU形式之多區窗在兩個窗片之間的區域中具有光管。該等光管係在該等窗片之著色區附近的區域中。兩個著色區為了持續採光而均處於清透狀態以傳遞入射外表面之太陽光。 在另一態樣中,呈IGU形式之多區窗在該IGU之兩個窗片之間的區域中包括一或多個IR鏡或IR反射器。在一個實例中,該等鏡/反射器位於與可保持於清透狀態之一或多個著色區對齊之區域中,以在太陽光在該區域處入射於外表面時允許持續採光進入房間中。 在另一態樣中,具有電致變色裝置之多區窗包括吸收IR或反射IR之膜以控制進入建築物中之熱且具有對進入房間中之光之方向的主動或被動控制。 - 微型遮蔽件 在具有微型遮蔽件之實施方案中,該等微型遮蔽件或該窗可經鉸接以調整進入房間中之光的方向。舉例而言,該等微型遮蔽件可經鉸接以對其定向而引導光自天花板彈開及/或保持平行。在一個實例中,多區窗為圓形的且可(至少)在其安裝於其中之牆壁之平面中旋轉,以便在太陽位置及方位角改變時採集光,例如,以在太陽位置改變時在相同方向上引導光。該圓形窗可另外具有可控地鉸接之微型遮蔽件以改變其定向而確保整天之恰當無眩光採光。在標題為「MULTI-PANE WINDOWS INCLUDING ELECTROCHROMIC DEVICES AND ELECTROMECHANICAL SYSTEMS DEVICES」且在2015年5月15日提交之美國專利申請案第14/443,353號中闡述微型遮蔽件及MEMS裝置之一些詳情,該申請案特此以引用方式整體併入。 具有微型遮蔽件之多區窗將通常安裝於無微型遮蔽件之可著色窗/區上方,且安裝於佔用者之高度以上,以幫助確保佔用者身上決不會有任何眩光。若該窗具有入射光之主動或被動瞄準,則可調整微型遮蔽件之角度以修改該角度來確保即便其放置於佔用者之高度以下亦不會有眩光。 在一些情況中,可基於來自房間中之攝影機或感測器(諸如佔用感測器)之輸入來控制具有用於光之被動或主動操縱之技術的多區窗。當與房間中之攝影機或感測器耦接時,此組態可使用主動瞄準來在希望時最佳地加熱房間。另外,與內部主動或被動反射表面耦接,該系統可採集光且將其引導至建築物之其他區域。舉例而言,可使用光管將光傳送至其他區域或僅藉由在牆壁中開孔以允許光較深地射入建築物中來將光引導至其他區域。 2. 演色性及經修改之色溫 可著色窗之著色可改變透射穿過可著色窗之光的量及透射至房間中之內部光的波長光譜及相關聯顏色。本文中闡述之一些著色組態具有提供入射光之偏好光譜選擇的技術。此等技術可增強照明以平衡室內顯現之顏色與適當波長中之自然光的量以改良視覺舒適性、晝夜節律調整及相關聯之生理反應。舉例而言,可著色窗可包括濾光層,該濾光層控制自然日光透射穿過窗。此等技術可改良進入房間中之入射日光的顏色及光譜及佔用者之舒適性、視覺感知、心情及健康。一些技術可改變房間中之光的CCT (相關色溫)及CRI (演色性指數)以使入射光顏色較接近於自然光。 一種著色組態提供自然照明與經過濾之光。此等組態亦可使用人工照明來增強及/或調整CCT及/或CRI。其他方法僅提供經過濾之光及人工照明來增強及/或調整CCT及/或CRI。 - 使用顏色平衡為佔用者實現較佳照明 如上文所概述,所闡述之方法需要在某些區域中著色而不在其他區域中著色,例如,一多區可著色窗之某些區或一組可著色窗中之某些窗,以為佔用者減少眩光同時允許環境光進入,亦即,所謂之「採光」,採光使用自然光來滿足照明要求及顏色偏移(顏色平衡),例如,來自賦予佔用者之空間的、可著色窗之不想要的藍色。一般而言,相較於來自(例如)白熾、發光二極體(LED)或螢光照明之人工照明,佔用者更喜歡自然太陽光。然而,隨著LED照明技術之進步,更大範圍之照明可能性、波長、頻率、顏色、強度或流明範圍、及類似者為可能的。特定實施例使用LED照明技術來偏移佔用者之空間中歸因於來自可著色窗之透射光而導致的藍色或其他不想要之顏色。在某些實施例中,對可著色窗之控制包括對LED照明之控制以校正此感知到及顯現之顏色而產生佔用者更喜歡之環境照明條件。此等方法可改良進入房間中之入射日光的顏色及光譜及佔用者之舒適性、視覺感知、心情及健康。一些方法改變房間中之光的CCT (相關色溫)及CRI (演色性指數)以使入射光顏色較接近於自然光。 在一些實施例中,使用LED照明來增強來自自然光源之採光,例如,在進入房間中之自然光的量、角度或其他因素使自然照明不足以偏移來自穿過可著色窗的經過濾之光的顏色時。舉例而言,電致變色窗可改變進入房間之自然光的光譜頻寬、顏色及量。藉由提供對入射光之較佳光譜選擇,吾人可提供增強照明以平衡內部顯現之顏色與在適當頻率中之所需自然光的量以確保視覺舒適性及(例如)晝夜節律調整及改良之生理反應。 在某些實施例中,將LED照明用作自然光之替代以便達成採光;亦即,當僅穿過已著色窗之經過濾之光可用時,調整LED照明以補償藉由可著色窗賦予的不想要之顏色。舉例而言,情況可能係,某些佔用者需要在著色方面均一之窗立面,亦即,多區窗,或者自美學觀點來看,使某些窗著色而不使其他窗著色係非所要的。在一個實施例中,對來自均一地著色之一窗或一組窗的經過濾之光(亦即,不使用某些窗或區來允許採光進入以偏移顏色)的顏色及光特性進行量測或基於可著色窗之已知過濾特性來進行計算。基於所獲得之值,使用LED照明來偏移不想要之顏色或其他光特性以便提高佔用者舒適性。一些方法改變房間中之光的CCT (相關色溫)及CRI (演色性指數)以使環境光顏色較接近於自然光之顏色。 在此等實施例中,經由預測演算法對入射光(具有或不具有自然光)模型化或藉由室內感測器(例如,在牆壁上,例如,在諸如相對於 23所闡述之牆壁單元中,或在允許光進入該空間中的可著色窗中之一或多者中)來直接量測入射光(具有或不具有自然光)。在一個實例中,在可著色窗處於較少著色(較少吸收)狀態時,使用LED照明來維持較高色溫,且在可著色窗處於較多著色(較多吸收)狀態時,藉由LED照明來賦予較低色溫(例如,較偏黃色)以便在該空間中維持較接近於自然照明之CRI。在下文在本說明書之「晝夜節律調整」及「健康模式」小節中闡述此等實施例之其他態樣。 - 晝夜節律調整 在某些著色組態中,控制(例如,藉由濾光片)著色以將入射光之波長光譜改變為適當之光波長而調整晝夜節律且因此有益於佔用者。 在一種技術中,控制(例如,藉由濾光片)著色以將入射光之波長光譜改變為佔用者較喜歡之顯現顏色。此種技術允許控制LED照明或其他照明以將此感知到及顯現之顏色校正為對佔用者較佳之照明條件。藉由控制處於適當之一個波長/多個波長的某量之自然採光的透射,可調整晝夜節律,此可有益於佔用者之康健及健康。 在此等組態中,控制邏輯可具有預測太陽輻射之量及方向的操作,或者房間中之感測器可量測太陽輻射之量及方向。舉例而言,房間中位於牆壁或窗上之輻照度感測器可向窗控制器發送具有定期量測結果之信號。在一種情況中,此感測器可能要被證明為足夠靈敏的(如在健康護理環境中)/被測試及校準以保證正確之結果。或者,吾人可自照明系統獲得此資訊。 為了提供晝夜節律智慧照明,窗可具有特定感測器,該感測器具有帶隙濾波器及時間追蹤器,以保證該窗在一天中之特定時間內提供所需自然光之恰當光譜。此可藉由穿過窗之日光及/或藉由增強之內部照明提供,其中已請求該內部照明以提供恰當量之適當波長的照明。 - 健康模式 此外,內部光之顏色可能會基於空間之功能而對不同空間中之佔用者的行為具有影響。控制邏輯可具有用於控制經過濾之自然光或增強之內部照明以有益於佔用者之心情及行為的單獨邏輯模組。此模組之操作可視房間中佔用者所處之空間的功能而不同地起作用。在一些情況中,使用者可能夠在使用者控制面板上選擇「健康模式」以根據被設計成改善佔用者之心情及行為的此模組來控制房間中之光。 在一些情況中,控制邏輯可適合於預測外部照明之波長及強度且接著將其與當前著色等級光譜特性組合且預測進入房間中之入射日光的光譜分佈。可(例如)使用天氣服務及基於太陽計算器計算出之太陽角度來預測外部照明之波長及強度。 經由與佔用者身上之裝置或與佔用感測器一起工作之如BLE等系統將佔用感測器包括在房間中,控制邏輯可相對於佔用分佈圖來選擇是否控制採光及窗。 或者,若房間具有能夠記錄房間中之亮度及光譜的攝影機,則可使用攝影機影像來判定是否存在佔用者、佔用者處於何處及為了校正EC過濾光將需要對內部光進行何種偏移或改變。此攝影機亦可經校準以確保就一天中之時間及特定位置而言佔用者獲得適量之適當光譜以有益於其晝夜節律。或者,藉由使用在天花板或每一燈中之大量感測器,可使用感測器資料來來驗證佔用者、是否佔用了特定位置及所需照明之顏色顯現以及有益於佔用者之晝夜節律的適量光譜。 基於健康考慮因素之著色決策係基於一或多個因素,包括:(1)具有適當波長光譜的房間中之照明,以調整佔用者之晝夜節律;(2)判定佔用位置以驗證該佔用者遇到之照明及暴露時間;(3)基於預定顏色顯現來提供房間中之內部光的適當演色性指數以校正EC IGU之經過濾光顏色;(4)房間中之內部光的相關色溫,以基於預定CCT量來校正EC IGU之經過濾光顏色,可應用該光顏色來改良指定內部空間中之光的心理作用;(5)考慮獨特感測器,該等感測器被證明為支持照明之適當光譜分佈以有益於佔用者之晝夜節律;以及(6)照明目標,該等照明目標基於是否有佔用者受照明影響而改變,該照明係藉由內部照明或EC IGU之經過濾光來控制。 C. 用於控制可著色窗之著色的控制邏輯之實例 在某些實施方案中,控制邏輯包括判定及控制可著色窗(例如,電致變色窗)中之著色以考慮佔用者舒適性及/或能量節省考慮因素的操作。在一些情況中,控制邏輯包括多個邏輯模組。將藉由一個邏輯模組判定之著色等級及/或其他計算輸入至另一邏輯模組以計算藉由所有模組判定之最終著色等級。若應用超控,則可使用超控值作為最終著色等級。一旦控制邏輯判定最終著色等級,則控制邏輯發送具有著色指令之控制信號以將可著色窗轉變至該最終著色等級。具有經組態以判定可著色窗之著色等級的邏輯模組之控制邏輯的實例可見於在2015年5月5日提交且標題為「CONTROL METHOD FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS」之國際PCT申請案PCT/US15/29675中,該申請案特此以引用方式整體併入。具有經組態以判定可著色窗之著色等級的邏輯模組之控制邏輯的另一實例可見於在2017年7月7日提交且標題為「CONTROL METHOD FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS」之國際PCT申請案PCT/US16/41344中,該申請案特此以引用方式整體併入。 在一些實施方案中,控制邏輯使用三個邏輯模組(本文中亦被稱作「模組A」、「模組B」及「模組C」)中之一或多者來判定在建築物之內部與外部之間的可著色窗之著色等級。每一控制邏輯模組可基於一未來時間來判定著色等級。舉例而言,計算中使用之未來時間可為在接收到著色指令之後足以允許完成轉變的未來時間。在此實例中,控制器可在實際轉變之前在當前時間發送著色指令。在轉變完成之前,窗將轉變至彼時所要之著色等級。 模組A可用於根據穿過可著色窗射至佔用區域或佔用者之活動區域上的直射太陽光來判定考慮佔用者舒適性之著色等級。基於在特定時刻直射太陽光射入房間中的計算出之穿透深度及房間中之空間類型(例如,窗附近之桌子、門廳等)來判定著色等級。在一個實例中,計算未來時間時之穿透深度以考慮到使窗轉變至新著色狀態所花之時間。可使用公眾可獲得之程式來基於一天中之時間、一年中之時間以及建築物之緯度及經度來計算太陽之位置。第一模組可基於窗之幾何形狀(例如,窗尺寸)、其在房間中之位置及定向、窗外之任何翅片或其他外部遮蔽及太陽之計算出之位置(例如,針對特定的一天中之時間及日期的直射太陽光之角度)來計算穿透深度。每一空間類型與不同著色等級相關聯,以實現佔用者舒適性。舉例而言,若活動為關鍵活動,諸如在桌子或電腦處完成辦公室之工作,且桌子位於窗附近,則所要著色等級可高於桌子遠離窗時之著色等級。作為另一實例,若活動為非關鍵的,諸如在門廳中之活動,則所要著色等級可低於具有桌子之相同空間之著色等級。將藉由模組A計算出之著色等級輸入至模組B。 模組B之控制邏輯可用於基於在晴空條件下透射穿過窗之輻照度(亦被稱作「晴空輻照度」)來判定著色等級。輻射可來自藉由大氣中之分子及微粒散射之太陽光。可使用一程式(諸如開放原始碼程式RADIANCE程式)來基於建築物之緯度及經度、一年中之一天及一天中之時間以及窗之定向來計算晴空輻照度。在一個實例中,模組B可用於判定比自模組A輸入之著色等級暗的著色等級且傳輸比在最大晴空輻照度下針對基準玻璃計算出的要傳輸之熱量少的熱量。最大晴空輻照度為針對晴空條件所計算出的所有時間之最高等級之輻照度。在一個實例中,模組C接著使用基準玻璃之太陽得熱係數(基準SHGC)及計算出之最大晴空輻照度來判定著色等級。模組B逐漸地增加在模組A中計算出之著色等級且取使得內部輻射小於或等於基準內部輻照度(基準SHGC×最大晴空輻照度)之著色等級。將在模組B中計算出之著色等級及計算出之晴空輻照度輸入至模組C中。 模組C中之控制邏輯可用於基於即時外部輻照度來判定著色等級,該即時外部輻照度係基於照射可著色窗之直射或反射光。該即時外部輻照度考慮到可能被在模組B中進行之晴空計算中未考慮到之物件(諸如建築物或天氣條件(例如,雲))阻擋或自該等物件反射之光。可基於以下一或多者來計算即時外部輻照度:藉由外部感測器取得之量測結果、經由通信網路接收到之天氣預報資料、建築物處之所判定雲量條件等。一般而言,模組B之控制邏輯將判定使藉由模組A判定之著色等級變暗(或不改變)之著色等級,且模組C之控制邏輯將判定使藉由模組B判定之著色等級變亮(或不改變)之著色等級。 模組C中之控制邏輯可基於外部輻照度及可著色窗之當前著色等級來判定房間中之內部輻照度。舉例而言,模組C可使用以下方程式基於晴空輻照度計算來判定計算出之內部輻照度:計算出之內部輻照度 = 著色等級SHGC×計算出之晴空輻照度。模組C可使用以下方程式基於外部感測器讀數或其他外部資料來計算即時內部輻照度: 即時內部輻照度 = 著色等級SHGC×輻照度讀數。在一個實施方案中,模組C使用以上方程式來計算在可著色窗具有在模組B中判定之著色等級時房間之內部輻照度且接著基於來自B之著色等級來判定滿足即時內部輻照度小於或等於計算出之內部輻照度之條件的著色等級。 模組B及/或模組C可判定除了佔用者舒適性之外亦考慮到能量節約之著色等級。此等模組可藉由將處於所判定之著色等級的可著色窗之效能與基準玻璃或其他標準參考窗進行比較來判定與特定著色等級相關聯之能量節省。使用此參考窗之目的可為確保控制邏輯符合市政建築規章之要求或在建築物之場所中使用之參考窗的其他要求。通常,市政當局使用習知低發射率玻璃來界定參考窗以控制建築物中之空氣調節負荷的量。作為參考窗如何納入控制邏輯中之實例,該邏輯可經設計,使得穿過給定可著色窗之輻照度決不會大於穿過如藉由各別市政當局指定之參考窗的最大輻照度。在所揭示之實施例中,控制邏輯可使用處於特定著色等級之可著色窗的SHGC值及參考窗之SHGC來判定使用該著色等級之能量節省。一般而言,SHGC之值為透射穿過該窗之所有波長的入射光之小部分。雖然在許多實施例中闡述了基準玻璃,但可使用其他標準參考窗。一般而言,參考窗(例如,基準玻璃)之SHGC為一變數,該變數對於不同之地理位置及窗定向而可為不同的,且基於藉由各別市政當局指定之規章要求。 一旦模組A、B及C判定最終著色等級,則控制邏輯可接收使超控值用作最終著色值的超控。一種類型之超控為房間之佔用者進行之手動超控,該佔用者判定特定著色等級(超控值)為所要的。可能存在手動超控自身被超控之情形。超控之另一實例為高需求(或峰值負荷)超控,該高需求超控與減少建築物中之能量消耗之設施要求相關聯。一旦控制邏輯判定最終著色等級,則控制邏輯發送具有著色指令之控制信號以將可著色窗轉變至該最終著色等級。 D. 用於調整人工內部照明及 / 或著色之控制邏輯 如上文所提到,電致變色窗或其他可著色窗之著色可改變透射穿過已著色窗之光的波長光譜及相關聯顏色以在房間中顯現顏色。舉例而言,處於較暗著色狀態之某些電致變色窗可在房間中賦予藍色。本文中闡述之某些技術涉及用於控制人工內部照明以增強來自房間中之一或多個電致變色窗或其他可著色窗之內部所顯現顏色的控制邏輯。此等技術可用於控制房間內部之演色性指數(CRI)及/或相關色溫(CCT)的等級以便(例如)改良視覺舒適性、調整晝夜節律等。CRI為內部照明向人眼精確地顯現物件之所有顏色的能力之量測值。通常,按0至百分之100之尺度來量測CRI值,其中CRI值愈高,顏色顯現愈好。CCT為可見光譜中之照明之顏色特性的溫度量測值。CCT值通常係以凱氏度(K)來量測。 在某些實施方案中,技術涉及判定房間之內部CRI之當前值的控制邏輯,且若當前值並非所要值,則發送控制信號以調整人工內部照明而增強內部照明以顯現所要內部CRI。另外地或另選地,某些實施方案判定房間之內部CCT的當前值及/或調整內部照明以顯現所要之內部CCT。在此等技術中,基於來自位於建築物外部之外部感測器、位於房間中之內部感測器的輸入及/或在房間內部與建築物外部之間的一或多個電致變色窗之著色狀態來判定內部CRI/CCT之當前值。可實施之外部感測器類型之一些實例包括紅外線感測器、環境溫度感測器及可見光光感測器。在具有一或多個外部感測器之實施方案中,外部感測器大體上被定位成與具有該房間之建築物外部之環境接觸。在一些情況中,外部感測器位於電致變色窗附近之立面上,例如,以判定窗處之輻照度等級以便判定窗外之外部CRI/CCT。在另一種情況中,外部感測器可位於建築物之屋頂上。在其他情況中,外部感測器可位於不同建築物處。在一些情況中,可使用外部感測器資料來預報天氣條件且將天氣預報資料傳送至控制器,該控制器向人工內部照明發送控制信號以進行調整及/或向電致變色窗發送控制信號以轉變著色。在標題為「MULTI-SENSOR」之美國專利申請案15/287,646中詳細地闡述可在多感測器裝置中使用的外部感測器之佈置的實例,該申請案特此以引用方式整體併入。此類多感測器裝置可安裝於建築物之屋頂上。在一個實施方案中,該多感測器裝置包括由具有不同定向之沿徑向取向且面向外之光感測器、垂直面朝上之光感測器、一或多個IR感測器及溫度感測器組成之環。在一個實例中,可使用來自IR感測器及溫度感測器之讀數來判定雲量條件。另外地或另選地,可使用來自不同之沿徑向取向之光感測器的輻照度讀數來計算與該等光感測器之定向不同之定向上的輻照度值。使用此種技術,可使用來自不同之沿徑向取向之光感測器的外部輻照度來判定取另一定向之窗的外部輻照度。在2016年4月7日提交之標題為為「COMBI-SENSOR SYSTEMS」的PCT公開案PCT/US15/52822中闡述此類技術之一實例,該申請案特此以引用方式整體併入。可藉由此等技術實施之內部感測器的一些實例包括可見光光感測器、溫度感測器及可用於計算房間之內部CRI及窗外部之CRI的其他感測器。內部感測器可位於房間內之各種合適位置,諸如,例如,在人工內部照明處或附近、在佔用者活動區域(諸如桌面或會議桌桌面)處或附近、牆壁等。另外,用於量測CRI且可用作用於量測內部CRI之內部感測器或用於量測外部CRI之外部感測器的市售裝置之實例為藉由Konica Minolta®製造之CL-70F CRI亮度計。另一實例為藉由Sekonic製造之C-700 SpectroMaster。 此等技術可用於各種類型之人工內部照明,包括(例如)白熾照明、發光二極體(LED)及/或螢光照明。可在此等實施方案中使用之人工內部照明的市售實例為藉由Phillips®製造之hue TM個人無線照明系統。可使用之人工內部照明的另一市售實例為藉由nanoleaf®製造之Aurora Lighting Smarter Kit TM。 下面係示出可藉由控制邏輯使用來控制房間中之內部CRI的輸入之組合的四種示例性情形之圖表。雖然參考單個電致變色窗來闡述此等情形之控制邏輯,但將理解,本揭示案並非限制性的且此控制邏輯可用於具有多個電致變色窗或其他可著色窗之房間。 情形 外部感測器 內部感測器 內部演色性指數 (CRI) 控制 1 僅基於玻璃之著色狀態 2 基於內部感測器讀數,使用LED照明來調整CRI 3 基於外部感測器讀數及玻璃之著色狀態,根據外部CRI來判定內部CRI,該外部CRI被變換成使用LED照明調整成所要CRI之內部CRI 4 可選擇用於#2、#3或兩者(藉由使用者或演算法) 在第一種情形中,僅基於電致變色窗之著色狀態來控制內部CRI。不使用來自任何內部或外部感測器之輸入來控制內部CRI。在一個實施方案中,將電致變色窗之每一著色狀態映射至特定內部CRI值或內部CRI值之範圍(例如,在查找表中)。可(例如)藉由量測所述產品玻璃之各種著色狀態下之CRI值來提前計算此等值。控制邏輯判定映射至所要CRI值/範圍的電致變色窗之著色狀態。舉例而言,最暗著色狀態(例如,1% T)可映射至與在房間中顯現藍色對應之內部CRI值。在此實施方案中,對內部CRI值/範圍之控制可不取決於對電致變色窗外部之光條件的瞭解。其可取決於(例如)房間是否被佔用,更具體而言,燈是否開著。可基於玻璃之著色狀態將所要CRI預設為使用者偏好。舉例而言,當著色狀態處於某一等級時且被使用者佔用之房間中的燈開著,則可自動地調整內部光以提供預設CRI。該照明調整可在玻璃之著色狀態達到之後進行,或可在玻璃之著色狀態改變期間動態地改變照明。在此種模式中不需要輸入感測器讀數,因為不主動地量測CRI,而是基於量測及/或計算基於使用者偏好來提前預設。不量測外部條件(雖然與內部CRI相關),亦即,因為玻璃處於特定著色狀態,假定外部照明條件保證玻璃如此著色,因此僅基於玻璃之著色狀態來調整CRI。 在某些實施例中,使用感測器讀數來增強CRI調整成所要值之精確性。舉例而言,在第二種情形中,使用來自房間中之一或多個內部感測器的量測結果來控制房間之內部CRI值。不使用來自任何外部感測器之量測結果或電致變色窗之著色狀態來判定內部CRI值。由於電致變色玻璃在外部光穿過該玻璃時使外部光發生變換,因此在此實施例中,外部照明條件為不相干的,使用一或多個內部感測器來判定內部照明條件且相應地調整內部照明條件以獲得恰當/所要之CRI。可將佔用感測器與光感測器一起使用來增強CRI調整。舉例而言,若房間當前未被佔用,則可避免CRI調整或進行對佔用者次佳且(例如)較符合照明系統之能量節省的CRI調整。當房間被佔用時,使用照明之CRI調整可超控潛在之能量節省設置,而支持用於佔用者之最佳CRI。在一個實施方案中,可校準或設計一或多個內部感測器以量測房間之內部CRI。在另一實施方案中,可(例如)在查找表中將內部感測器量測結果之範圍映射至內部CRI值(或範圍)。控制邏輯在此實例中判定內部感測器量測結果係在特定範圍內且判定與彼範圍相關聯之CRI值。在此第二種情形中,基於內部感測量測結果來調整人工內部照明。來自內部感測器之量測結果控制對人工內部照明進行之調整。在一些實施例中,用內部感測器量測結果作為輸入來僅將內部CRI調整為使用者偏好以獲得所要結果。在另一實施例中,控制邏輯將所量測到之內部CRI值與恰當/所要值相比較且若存在差異,則控制信號基於該差異來調整人工內部照明以增強房間中之內部照明。 在第三種情形中,使用來自一或多個外部感測器之量測結果及著色狀態來獲得房間之所要內部CRI值(本文中亦被稱作「內部CRI」)。控制邏輯計算或量測(例如,利用多感測器裝置)外部CRI (本文中亦被稱作「外部CRI」)。基於電致變色玻璃之著色狀態,控制邏輯藉由基於外部CRI及所述玻璃之已知光吸收及顏色改變特性來計算內部CRI來將外部CRI變換成內部CRI。接著,控制邏輯向人工照明(例如,LED照明)發送信號以調至房間中之較佳或定製CRI值(若所計算出之內部CRI尚未處於較佳等級,則邏輯進行此比較)。在此第三種情形中,不使用來自內部感測器之量測結果。由於電致變色玻璃在外部光穿過已著色玻璃時使外部光發生變換,因此可基於外部CRI之量測結果及玻璃之著色狀態來計算內部CRI。不需要內部照明條件。外部CRI可基於藉由一或多個外部感測器取得之量測結果。在一個實施方案中,該一或多個外部感測器可經校準或設計以量測窗附近及/或大體上建築物區域附近之外部CRI。在另一實施方案中,可(例如)在查找表中將外部感測器量測結果之範圍映射至外部CRI值(或範圍)。控制邏輯使用外部CRI值及玻璃之著色狀態特性來獲得內部CRI值且接著對其進行調整以匹配所要值(若其尚未與之匹配)。在一個實施方案中,可將著色狀態與外部CRI值之不同組合映射至特定內部CRI值。舉例而言,假定窗之簾牆全處於相同著色狀態,可獲得一個內部CRI,但若窗簾牆中之一或多個窗著色至不同著色狀態,則獲得不同內部CRI值且可藉由相應地改變內部照明來調整該內部CRI值。在一個實施例中,僅根據基於窗之狀態及量測到之外部CRI之計算值來調整內部CRI。在另一實施例中,控制邏輯將所計算出之內部CRI值與所要結果進行比較。在另一實施例中,控制邏輯將所量測到之內部CRI值與恰當/所要值相比較且若存在差異,則控制信號基於該差異來調整人工內部照明以增強房間中之內部照明。 在第四種情形中,控制邏輯使用使用者輸入來基於來自一或多個外部感測器之量測結果及/或基於來自一或多個內部感測器之量測結果來判定是否控制房間中之內部CRI。亦即,第二種情形與第三種情形之組合,例如,基於使用者偏好及/或方法之精確性(內部感測器、外部感測器或兩者),該精確性可取決於內部及外部CRI量測精確性(其可隨照明條件及彼等條件(例如,對於外部感測器,陰天條件)中之感測器的精確性或有效性而變)。若使用者輸入選擇將要使用外部感測器,則根據上文闡述之第三種情形,控制邏輯使用來自一或多個外部感測器之量測結果來判定房間中之內部CRI。若使用者輸入選擇將使用內部感測器,則根據上文闡述之第二種情形,控制邏輯使用來自一或多個內部感測器之量測結果來判定內部CRI。控制邏輯接著發送控制信號來調整人工內部照明以增強房間中之內部照明使之為或接近所要內部CRI。在其他實施例中,使用感測器來判定外部CRI,且因此可藉由計算或藉助於內部感測器量測結果來進行內部CRI之更精確判定。使用者基於預設標準來選擇偏好或演算法,無論是否使用內部感測器和外部感測器中之一者或兩者來判定外部及/或內部照明條件作為輸入以判定恰當之內部CRI。第四實施例之重要性為感測器(內部及/或外部)在某些環境條件中比在其他環境條件中更有用。舉例而言,情況可能係,在陰天條件在外部占主導地位時,外部感測器效率較低而無法提供精確資料供輸入至控制邏輯,且僅使用內部感測器來判定及調整內部CRT更精確。 雖然在上文就調整人工內部照明使得房間中之照明處於或接近所要內部CRI來闡述此四種情形,但將理解,在其他實施例中,調整人工內部照明可用於更改房間中之照明以匹配CRI及CCT、或CCT之特定預設值。 在調整人工內部照明之此等技術的某些實施方案中,使用者可輸入用於調整人工內部照明之設置。在一個實施方案中,在第四種情形中,使用者可判定是否使用內部及/或外部感測器來控制房間之內部CRI。舉例而言,使用者可為建築物系統管理員,該管理員在房間中無內部感測器時或在內部感測器不可操作時選擇使用外部感測器。在另一實施方案中,使用者提供在房間中使用之CRI及/或CCT設置。使用者可在(例如)行動裝置、牆壁裝置(諸如,例如, 23中所示)或經由通信網路與執行控制邏輯之一或多個控制器通信的其他合適計算裝置之使用者介面上輸入該等設置。在一些情況中,使用者可輸入不同之較佳CRI及/或CCT設置之排程以在一天中之不同時間及一年中之某些天使用。在其他情況中,使用者可輸入超控設置。在另一實施方案中,使用者可選擇使用哪種類型之感測器輸入或感測器輸入之組合來判定房間之內部CRI。舉例而言,根據第三種情形,使用者可選擇使用天氣預報資料來判定內部CRI,其中天氣預報資料係得自外部感測器之特定組合。在一些情況中,此等外部感測器可位於單獨建築物處且天氣預報資料經由通信網路傳送至具有該房間之建築物處的控制器。在某些實施方案中,控制軟體自動地將環境天氣條件作為輸入而納入考慮來調整內部CRI及是否使用外部及/或內部感測器。 在一個實施方案中,控制邏輯自使用者輸入之歷史資料中獲知。舉例而言,房間中之一或多個使用者輸入CRI/CCT設置的例子及該輸入之相關聯時間(一年中之一天及一天中之時間)可儲存於記憶體中作為歷史資料。可評估歷史資料之趨勢以預測未來時間時之適當CRI/CCT設置。舉例而言,房間之佔用者可在一週中之每個工作日相同之時間每天選擇特定CRI設置。控制邏輯將此資訊儲存為歷史資料、評估該歷史資料作為趨勢及在下一週之工作日期間在該相同時間時(或就在該時間之前)將所要內部CRI等級設置為此設置。以此方式,控制邏輯可自動地調整其CRI/CCT設置使之適應使用者偏好。 根據某些實施方案,以上情形之控制邏輯合併至預測性邏輯中,該預測性邏輯判定一或多個電致變色窗之著色狀態及/或對內部照明之調整以獲得在未來時間時之所要內部CRI。在以上小節中闡述了可用於計算一或多個電致變色窗之著色狀態以考慮到佔用者舒適性及/或能量考慮因素的、可購自Milpitas, California之View, Inc.的Intelligence®之邏輯模組模組A、模組B及模組C的實例。在2015年5月7日提交且標題為「CONTROL METHOD FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS」之美國專利申請案15/347,677中闡述用於判定電致變色窗之著色狀態的其他預測性控制邏輯之另一實例,該申請案特此以引用方式整體併入。 22為根據實施例之一方法的流程圖 2200,該方法實施用於控制具有一或多個電致變色窗之房間之內部CRI的預測性控制邏輯。雖然相對於電致變色窗闡述此方法,但該方法可用其他可著色窗實施。在操作 2220中,控制邏輯使用模組A、B及C中之一或多者來計算在未來時間房間中之一或多個電致變色窗的著色等級。在一種情況中,計算中使用之未來時間可為在接收到具有著色指令之控制信號之後允許窗完成轉變的將來足夠遠之時間。在以上小節中闡述了關於模組A、B及C之詳情。模組A、B及C輸出在未來時間一或多個電致變色窗之著色等級、感測器讀數(內部及/或外部)、包括定向之窗組態、一天中之時間、一年中之一天、視情況存在之天氣條件及由該等模組使用之其他資料。 在操作 2230中,預測性控制邏輯判定未來時間時之所要/恰當內部CRI。在某些實施方案中,所要內部CRI預設為使用者偏好。在一個實例中,所要內部CRI可基於用於控制房間中之人工內部照明的使用者輸入之歷史資料的趨勢。作為另一實例,所要內部CRI可為使用者輸入之超控值。另外地或另選地,所要內部CRI可基於排程資訊。在一些情況中,此排程可藉由使用者判定或調整。在其他情況中,控制邏輯可基於歷史資料來調整排程。 在操作 2250中,控制邏輯判定對內部照明及/或電致變色窗之著色狀態的調整以獲得房間中之所要/恰當內部CRI。舉例而言,控制邏輯可判定要啟動之燈的類型、要啟動之一或多種顏色或燈、所啟動之燈的強度等級設置、所啟動之燈的位置、要啟動之燈的數目及佈置等。 一旦判定調整,則控制邏輯發送用於調整房間中之人工內部照明及/或電致變色窗之著色狀態的控制信號(操作 2260)。方法接著再回到操作 2220。 在根據第一種情形之實施方案中,基於一或多個電致變色窗之著色狀態來判定房間之內部CRI。在一個實例中,當來自模組A、B及C之著色狀態為某一等級,且在使用者佔用之房間中內部照明開啟時,控制邏輯自動地判定調整且發送控制信號來自動地調整內部燈以提供使用者預設之內部CRI。 根據第二種情形之實施方案,使用來自房間中之一或多個內部感測器的量測結果來判定房間之內部CRI值。在一個實例中,控制邏輯自動地判定對內部照明及/或著色等級之調整,該等調整將CRI值調整為所要等級。 根據第三種情形之實施方案,可使用來自一或多個外部感測器之量測結果來基於一或多個電致變色窗之著色等級來判定變換成內部CRI之外部CRI。舉例而言,假定窗之簾牆全處於相同著色狀態,可獲得一個內部CRI,但若窗之簾牆中之一或多個窗著色至不同著色狀態,則獲得不同之內部CRI值且可藉由相應地改變內部照明來調整該不同之內部CRI值。在一個實施例中,僅根據基於窗之著色狀態及量測到之外部CRI之計算值來調整內部CRI。 根據第四種情形之實施方案,如上文相對於第一種及第二種情形所闡述,可使用來自一或多個外部感測器及/或內部感測器之量測結果來判定內部CRI且判定調整。 在某些實施方案中,基於該四種情形,具有模組A、B及C之預測性控制邏輯亦包括超控邏輯模組。在此實施方案中,超控邏輯模組可調整(超控)藉由模組A、B及C判定的一或多個電致變色窗之著色狀態及/或調整內部照明以在房間中獲得所要CRI。舉例而言,在實施第三種情形時,控制邏輯可判定是否使用自模組A、B及C輸出之著色狀態,窗之簾牆將在未來時間處於最暗著色狀態。在此種情況中,為了獲得恰當之CRI,內部照明將需要在未來時間時調整為高強度設置。控制邏輯亦可判定若窗之子集保持於較低著色狀態,則可在內部照明未開啟之情況下獲得恰當CRI。在此實例中,控制邏輯可判定要在未來時間將窗之子集調整為較低著色狀態且不調整內部照明。 E. 佔用輸入及佔用者位置之動態感知 在某些實施方案中,使用控制邏輯來控制多區可著色窗之每一著色區、窗之組(或區)中之個別窗或其組合的著色狀態。在一些情況中,控制邏輯首先判定具有該窗之房間是被佔用還是未被佔用。控制邏輯可基於一或多個資料,諸如,例如,排程資訊、佔用感測器資料、資產追蹤資訊或其他佔用者追蹤資料、經由遙控器或諸如 23中所示之牆壁單元來自使用者之啟動資料等中之一或多者,來作出其判定。遙控器可呈手持式裝置(諸如智慧電話)之形式或可為計算裝置(諸如膝上型電腦)。舉例而言,若排程資訊指示佔用者很可能在房間中,則控制邏輯可判定房間被佔用。作為另一實例,控制邏輯可基於來自佔用感測器之讀數來判定房間被佔用。在另一實例中,若佔用者已在牆壁單元或遙控器之手動控制面板處輸入指示佔用之資訊,則控制邏輯可判定房間被佔用。 若房間被佔用,則控制邏輯判定在被佔用或可能被佔用之區域中是否存在眩光條件。控制邏輯基於佔用者在房間中之位置來判定著色區之著色狀態。舉例而言,可判定著色狀態以避免可能大概被佔用或被佔用之桌子或其他區域上的眩光。在一些情況中,佔用者之當前位置係基於自佔用查找表擷取之資訊。在其他情況中,佔用者之當前位置係基於來自感測器(例如,佔用感測器)之信號中的資料。感測器可產生具有佔用者在房間中之位置的信號。窗控制器可接收該信號。作為另一實例,使用者可(例如)經由房間中之控制面板來提供關於佔用者在房間中之位置的資料。 23為根據一實施例的具有手動控制面板之牆壁單元的實例的像片。 在某些態樣中,一種控制方法判定具有採光著色區之多區可著色窗中的著色區之著色狀態。在此等情況中,該控制方法判定最大化採光同時控制來自進入房間之太陽輻射之眩光及/或熱負荷的著色狀態。在某些態樣中,使用者可使用控制面板 (例如,房間中之手動控制面板或電腦介面)來選擇「採光模式」或「均一模式」、另一預定模式或藉由使用者定製之模式。舉例而言,使用者可能夠為房間中之窗的區定製不同著色狀態,例如,「使用者1-模式1」。在「採光模式」下,該控制方法為窗之採光著色區判定清透著色狀態或比其他著色區亮之著色狀態。在「均一模式」下,該控制方法基於不同於用於採光之標準來判定區之著色狀態。 E. 多區偏好 / 佔用模式之回饋獲知 在某些態樣中,用於控制著色區/窗之著色狀態的控制邏輯係基於對偏好及佔用模式之回饋獲知。舉例而言,如藉由感測器判定、來自使用者輸入等的佔用者在不同時間/日期時之位置可儲存為佔用模式。此等在不同時間/日期時之佔用位置可用於預測佔用者在未來時間之位置。該控制方法可接著基於所預測之佔用者位置來控制著色狀態。 作為另一實例,可儲存為不同著色區在某些時間選擇某些著色狀態之使用者輸入。使用者之此等著色選擇可用於預測房間中可能希望之著色狀態。該控制方法可接著根據使用者所希望之此等預測著色狀態來控制著色狀態。 F. 用於判定眩光條件的進入房間中之光投射 在某些實施方案中,控制邏輯包括藉由計算房間中來自著色區之光的三維投射來判定穿過著色區之直射太陽光是否在佔用區域中產生眩光條件的指令。光之三維投射可被視為房間中外部光直接射入房間中的光之體積。舉例而言,三維投射可藉由穿過多區窗之著色區的來自太陽之平行光線界定。進入房間中之三維投射的方向係基於太陽方位角及/或太陽高度,可基於一天中之時間及窗之經度及緯度座標藉由太陽計算器來計算太陽方位角及/或太陽高度。光之三維投射可用於判定與房間中之佔用區域的相交。該控制邏輯判定特定平面處之光投射且判定光投射或與光投射相關聯之眩光區域與佔用區域重疊的量。若光投射係在佔用區域之外,則判定不存在眩光情形。在2015年5月5日提交且標題為「CONTROL METHOD FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS」之PCT申請案PCT/US15/29675中闡述使用光之三維投射來判定眩光情形的控制邏輯之詳情,該申請案特此以引用方式整體併入。 24A 24B 24C為根據一實施例的各自具有房間(垂直牆壁未示出) 2400之透視圖的示意圖,該房間具有在建築物外部與房間 2400內部之間的垂直牆壁中的多區窗 2410,該多區窗具有第一著色區 2412及第二著色區 2414 24A 24B 28C分別示出三種不同之太陽光情形,其中太陽光以與太陽之不同位置相關聯的三個不同方向 245024602470(繪示為虛線箭頭)照射穿過多區窗 2410。在所示實例中,房間 2400具有為佔用者之位置或可能位置的佔用區域 2450。佔用區域 2450可為(例如)桌子或另一工作場所。在此實例中,佔用區域 2450被界定為房間 2400之地板上的二維區域。在 24A 24B 28C中示出之所示實例中之每一者中,太陽光(繪示為方向箭頭)照射多區窗 2410之第一著色區 2412及第二著色區 2414。 根據一個態樣,控制邏輯基於太陽之位置判定穿過兩個著色區 24122414中之每一者及穿過房間 2400之光的投射。控制邏輯判定穿過兩個著色區 24122414中之每一者的光與包括二維佔用區域 2450之平面的交點處之二維光投射,該平面與房間 2400之地板的表面共面。在 24A中,繪示穿過第一著色區 2412之第一二維光投射 2416,且繪示穿過房間 2400之地板上之第二著色區 2414的第二二維光投射 2418。在 24B中,繪示穿過第一著色區 2412之第一二維光投射 2416,且繪示穿過房間 2400之地板上之第二著色區 2414的第二二維光投射 2420。在 24C中,繪示穿過第一著色區 2412之第一二維光投射 2426,且繪示穿過房間 2400之地板上之第二著色區 2414的第二二維光投射 2428。控制邏輯接著判定來自著色區之二維光投射是否與佔用區域相交。若二維光投射與佔用區域相交,則控制邏輯將對應著色區置於(保持於或轉變至)變暗著色狀態。雖然示出兩個著色區,但將理解,使用類似方法,額外區及/或不同位置之著色區將適用。 在 24A中所示之第一種情形中,例如,穿過著色區 24122414之二維光投射 24162416均未與佔用區域 2450相交。在此種情況中,將著色區 24122414置於清透狀態。 在 24B中所示之第二種情形中,第一二維光投射 2420與佔用區域 2450相交,且第二二維光投射 2422不與佔用區域 2450相交。在此種情形中,將第一著色區 2412置於變暗著色狀態以避免眩光情形。由於第二二維光投射 2422未與佔用區域 2450相交,因此將第二著色區 2414置於清透狀態。 在 24C中所示之第三種情形中,第一二維光投射 2426及第二二維光投射 2428與佔用區域 2450相交。在此種情形中,將第一著色區 2412及第二著色區 2414置於變暗著色狀態以在佔用區域 2450上避免眩光情形。 雖然 24A 、圖 24B 24C中之所示實例包括多區可著色窗,但類似技術亦將應用於單獨且相鄰之可著色窗。舉例而言,房間可具有在建築物外部與房間內部之間的垂直牆壁中之兩個單獨且相鄰之可著色窗。使用控制邏輯,基於太陽之位置引導來自每一可著色窗之光的三維投射穿過房間。控制邏輯判定佔用區域之平面處的穿過每一窗之二維光投射。控制邏輯接著判定來自每一窗之二維光投射是否與佔用區域相交。若該二維光投射與佔用區域相交,則控制邏輯將對應窗置於(保持於或轉變至)變暗著色狀態。 G. 用於控制眩光、環境光等級及顏色及 / 或對比率之控制邏輯 某些實施例係關於調整人工照明及/或可著色窗之著色以在佔用區域中提供相對恆定之亮度級及環境光譜內容的控制邏輯。通常,該控制邏輯調整人工照明及/或可著色窗之著色,使得照射佔用區域中之物件之表面的組合光與自然光譜類似,使得所照亮之物件反映其真實之顏色。雖然通常設為自然光譜,但可或者為當前佔用者定製環境光譜內容以提供(例如)撫慰光、光療法以調整晝夜節律或提供恢復愈療等。藉由調整可著色窗之著色狀態,控制邏輯可控制穿過可著色窗之直射太陽光(眩光)及藉由穿過窗之光投射賦予之顏色(例如,藍光)。藉由調整人工照明,控制邏輯可偏移眩光之效應且調整環境顏色。對著色狀態與人工照明之組合控制可在佔用區域中提供處於所要等級的相對恆定之環境光等級及光譜內容。 在一個態樣中,控制邏輯可控制可調人工照明以調整光照之顏色(波長範圍)、照度級及/或照明方向。可選擇此等調整以藉由減少眩光及改良環境光譜內容及/或減小佔用區域中之對比率來增加佔用者舒適性。舉例而言,控制邏輯可控制可調人工照明之波長及流明/照度設置以偏移佔用區域中之對比率。可調室內人工照明之實例為Lithonia Lighting ®出售之BLT系列可調白光LED,該LED可調至在0至1000勒克斯(100%)之間變化的不同照度級及在2700凱氏與6500凱氏之間調整的顏色。另外地或另選地,該可調人工照明可具有處於不同位置之多個光源及/或具有可移動以改變光方向之光源。控制邏輯可控制人工照明之各種光源以照亮某些區域。舉例而言,可調整室內人工照明以將光引導至具有受穿過著色窗之外部眩光影響的佔用者之佔用區域。反射光為自人工光反射之光與光投射之組合以在佔用區域中產生更均一之強度及顏色。此可減少佔用者感知到之眩光,如此可增加佔用者舒適性及生產力。 如本文中所使用,「負設置」係指可調人造光源之設置,該設置提供在偏移來自穿過已著色窗之光之顏色的波長範圍中之光照。舉例而言,若處於其最暗狀態之可著色窗向穿過該窗之光賦予藍色,則負設置之偏移顏色將為紅光或紅光與黃光之組合。在此實例中,負設置中之可調人造光源將提供紅光或紅光與黃光之光照。在一個態樣中,控制邏輯對可調室內人工照明啟動負設置以將光引導至具有穿過已著色窗之光投射的佔用區域,以偏移來自該光投射之眩光及顏色之效應。 減小藉由不同強度之不同照明源照亮之表面的各部分之間的界面處之強烈對比可提高佔用者之視覺舒適性。在某些實施方案中,控制邏輯基於根據來自建築物系統之回饋判定之區域中的當前對比率來調整建築物系統之功能。舉例而言,可基於一區域(諸如佔用區域或其他周圍區域)中之光的當前照度及/或顏色來判定該區域中之對比率。可藉由以下一或多者來判定當前照度及顏色:來自建築物中之一或多個感測器(例如,攝影機、熱感測器等)之量測結果、人工照明之當前設置及位置等。具有可量測環境光之照度及顏色之感測器的裝置之實例為光譜儀,諸如,例如,由Sekonic ®製造之市售C-7000 spectromaster。控制邏輯調整建築物系統之功能以將該區域中之對比率調整為可接受等級。舉例而言,可調整該等建築物系統,使得對比率低於可接受範圍內或低於最大極限值。作為另一實例,可調整該等建築物系統,使得基於人工照明之照度及顏色的查找表來使對比率維持於可接受等級內,該人工照明可用於偏移來自穿過具有不同著色等級之電致變色窗的光投射之反射光。 25為根據一實施方案的量測到之照度(勒克斯)對量測到之色溫(凱氏)的圖。該圖示出三個不同區域:闡述為溫暖且彩色、看起來紅色之上部區域、闡述為令人愉悅之中間區域及闡述為冷且暗、看起來藍色之下部區域。該圖包括在人工照明按全亮度等級開啟且設置為2700凱氏時在下午12:30在與處於最暗著色狀態之窗相距0呎、2呎、4呎及6呎之四個距離處取得之照度及色溫的量測值之四個點。若人工照明關閉,則照度及色溫將可能位於下部區域中。如所示,在人工照明開啟時之量測結果偏移藍光,將量測到之照度及色溫帶至中間區域及上部區域中。查找表之實例包括內部人工光設置(按凱氏計之色溫及按勒克斯計之亮度級),該等內部人工光設置將在與已著色窗相距不同距離之佔用區域中在一天中之特定時間時針對不同著色狀態使對比率維持於可接受等級內。在一個態樣中,控制邏輯可使用此類查找表來判定將使對比率維持於可接受等級內的內部人工光之設置。 在某些實施方案中,控制邏輯基於自建築物系統接收到之回饋來對人工照明之設置及可著色窗之著色狀態進行調整以便在佔用區域中提供為佔用者特別設計或更一般地為工作場所設計之亮度級及環境光譜內容。該回饋可包括(例如)可著色窗之當前著色狀態、關於佔用區域或工作場所中佔用者之存在或可能存在的資料、環境光之照度及顏色的所量測到之等級、關於佔用者之資料(諸如年齡、性別及晝夜節律)、關於佔用區域或工作場所之資訊等。此回饋資訊可來自關於藉由建築物系統取得之資料的讀數或判定或可來自基於歷史資料之排程資訊。控制邏輯可調整人工照明及著色以產生為佔用者或工作場所之使用環境(例如,居住的、一般的、商用的)定製之特定光譜內容及亮度級。將在下一小節中闡述關於此控制邏輯之更多詳情。 在一個態樣中,可使用與參考 22闡述之方法類似的方法來實施用於控制具有一或多個可著色窗之房間的佔用區域中之對比率的邏輯。在此種方法中,控制邏輯使用模組A、B及C中之一或多者來計算在未來時間房間中之一或多個可著色窗的著色等級。在一種情況中,計算中使用之未來時間可為在接收到具有著色指令之控制信號之後允許窗完成轉變的將來足夠遠之時間。模組A、B及C輸出未來時間一或多個可著色窗之著色等級、感測器讀數(內部及/或外部)、包括定向、一天中之時間、一年中之一天的窗組態、視情況存在之天氣條件及藉由該等模組使用之其他資料。預測性控制邏輯判定未來時間時之可接受對比率。控制邏輯接著判定對內部照明及/或可著色窗之著色狀態的調整來在房間中獲得低於或處於可接受等級之對比率。舉例而言,控制邏輯可判定要啟動之燈的類型、要啟動之一或多種顏色或燈、所啟動之燈的強度等級設置、所啟動之燈的位置、要啟動之燈的數目及佈置等。一旦判定調整,則控制邏輯發送用於調整房間中之人工內部照明及/或電致變色窗之著色狀態的控制信號,且接著方法再返回至模組A、B及C。 H. 用於佔用者設計之場景的控制邏輯 某些實施例係關於維持被設計成在工作場所中提供佔用者滿意度及舒適等級(諸如視覺舒適性、熱舒適性、聲舒適性及空氣品質)的環境因素之場景的控制邏輯。該控制邏輯藉由對該等建築物系統之設置進行調整來維持該等環境因素。該控制邏輯基於自(例如)建築物系統、佔用者、建築物管理系統等接收到之各種回饋來設計環境因素。可使用之回饋的一些實例包括可著色窗之當前著色狀態、關於佔用者之存在或可能存在的資料、環境光之照度及顏色的量測到之等級、關於佔用者之資料(諸如年齡、性別及晝夜節律)、雜訊資料、環境溫度資料、空氣品質資料、關於可用建築物系統之資料等。藉由該回饋,該控制邏輯判定佔用,該佔用包括一或多個佔用者在工作場所中之存在及位置。該控制邏輯基於多種資訊,諸如排程資訊、感測器量測結果、來自佔用者之輸入或來自映射系統之資料,來判定佔用。此類映射系統之實例包括用於傳送射頻、微波或其他電磁波之發射器及接收器。所接收到之傳輸可用於映射工作場所中之佔用者及其他物件的當前位置。該控制邏輯亦開發用於每一佔用者及/或工作場所之使用案例以判定用於判定場景之參數,諸如佔用者類型、工作場所類型、周圍環境之暫時組成(照度級、環境光顏色、雜訊級、空氣品質等)、停留持續時間、建築物考慮因素(諸如能量及成本)及可用於改變周圍環境之現有建築物系統。基於使用案例,控制邏輯設計一場景,該場景包括所有環境因素、或某部分之環境因素,此取決於哪些技術或控制在工作場所處起作用。可將環境因素分組到多種類別中,諸如,例如,熱設置、視覺設置、聲設置及空氣品質設置。工作場所中之停留持續時間為一些環境因素(諸如雜訊及空氣品質)之考慮因素。對於每一佔用者及/或工作場所,控制邏輯判定將在該場景中使用之環境因素且判定所述環境因素之目標等級。藉由判定針對該使用案例設計之等級來設計此等等級以滿足佔用者需要或預期。控制邏輯接著判定建築物系統之任何新控制設置且(例如)經由BMC或BAC向建築物系統傳送該等新設置。 在一個態樣中,使用來自業界最好之實踐之資料來初始化特定使用案例之場景且接著基於來自佔用者、建築物管理系統及/或業界之回饋來修改該等場景。控制邏輯基於新環境因素來修改或更新該等場景。舉例而言,控制邏輯可接收來自具有未預料到之設置之建築物的回饋,該等設置提供更好地匹配或超過佔用者對工作場所設置之預期的非直觀「樂事」。 在另一態樣中,控制邏輯可基於來自當前佔用者之輸入,諸如基於在使用者介面處對佔用者之一連串詢問,來初始化特定使用案例之場景。 在一個態樣中,基於來自佔用者、建築物系統、建築物管理系統、業界及任何其他合適回饋源之回饋來修改特定使用案例之場景。舉例而言,該控制邏輯可接收來自佔用者的關於特定場景之環境因素的超控或正面或負面回饋。該控制邏輯可基於該回饋來判定場景之環境因素的新等級。 工作場所類型之一些實例包括私人辦公室、庇護所、角落、集中思考間、思考間、小型會議室、開放辦公室、喧鬧地區、等候區、過渡區、會議室、創造性思考空間、門廳、廣場、餐廳及辦公空間。 26為根據一實施方案示出各種類型之工作場所的建築物之示意圖。在所示實例中,工作場所被分組為包括工作站及矮桌之「個人工作之工作場所」、包括個人沙發、會議桌及小型會議室之「開放合作之工作場所」、包括編輯室、談話間、思考間、會客間、會議間及會議室之「封閉會議工作場所」、包括儲物櫃、複印機及食品儲藏室之「局部支持工作場所」及包括休息室、保健室及招待室之「公共區域工作場所」。 控制邏輯部分基於工作場所之類型來判定使用案例。舉例而言,私人辦公室通常用於重點任務或創造性活動。結果,私人辦公室需要具有溫暖溫度及暖色環境光之環境設置的場景。除了為了獲得最大效能而設計場景之外,場景亦可被設計成匹配佔用者對考慮周全之工作場所的預期。舉例而言,餐廳需要具有充滿活力且鼓勵溝通及社交之亮度級(照度)及背景雜訊的場景。在此實例中,佔用者對餐廳中之場景的預期將為較明亮、較嘈雜及較酷。 私人辦公室一般係指用於不分散精力地集中精力工作或休整的區域。私人辦公室可為(例如)開放平面中之封閉空間、半庇護式或遮蔽空間。 針對私人辦公室中之視覺舒適性設計之場景的環境因素之一實例包括500勒克斯至700勒克斯(低)之亮度級及4000K (暖)之色溫。針對私人辦公室中之視覺舒適性設計之場景的環境因素之另一實例包括1000勒克斯至2000勒克斯(高)之亮度級及6000K (冷)之色溫。針對私人辦公室中之熱舒適性設計之場景的環境因素之一實例包括25℃(暖)之溫度。針對私人辦公室中之聲舒適性設計之環境因素的一實例包括45 dB之聲級及75%之隱私指數。針對私人辦公室中之聲舒適性設計之場景的環境因素之另一實例包括35 dB之聲級及95%之隱私指數。針對私人辦公室中之空氣品質設計之場景的環境因素之一實例包括500 ppm之CO 2含量。 與私人辦公室類似,思考間或小型會議室亦指用於不分散精力地集中精力工作或休整的區域。思考間或小型會議室被設計成佔用者比私人辦公室具有較少隱私。思考間或小型會議室亦可為開放平面中之封閉空間、半庇護式或遮蔽空間。針對思考間或小型會議室中之視覺舒適性設計之場景的環境因素之一實例包括1000勒克斯至2000勒克斯(高)之亮度級及6000K (冷)之色溫。針對思考間或小型會議室中之熱舒適性設計之場景的環境因素之一實例包括22℃至25℃ (中等)之亮度級。針對思考間或小型會議室中之聲舒適性設計之場景的環境因素之一實例包括55 dB至75 dB之聲級及55%之隱私指數。針對思考間或小型會議室中之空氣品質控制設計之場景的環境因素之一實例包括500 ppm之CO 2含量。 等候區或過渡區一般係指與會議室及/或私人辦公室相鄰的等待/聚集之區域。等候區或過渡區被設計用於具有可見性及半隱私交流之短暫停留。針對等候區或過渡區中之視覺舒適性設計之場景的環境因素之一實例包括500勒克斯至1500勒克斯(高)之亮度級及4500至6000K (冷)之色溫。針對等候區或過渡區中之熱舒適性設計之場景的環境因素之一實例包括22℃至25℃ (中等)之亮度級。針對等候區或過渡區中之聲舒適性設計之場景的環境因素之一實例包括55 dB之聲級及50%至75%之隱私指數。針對等候區或過渡區中之空氣品質控制設計之場景的環境因素之一實例包括1500 ppm之CO 2含量。 會議室一般係指需要適當之光及高信號雜訊比的用於進行分享及討論之區域。針對會議室中之視覺舒適性設計之場景的環境因素之一實例包括500勒克斯至1500勒克斯(高)之亮度級及3500至4500K (中等)之色溫。針對會議室中之熱舒適性設計之場景的環境因素之一實例為20℃至23℃ (中等)之亮度級。針對會議室中之聲舒適性設計之場景的環境因素之一實例包括44 dB至55 dB之聲級及80%至95%之隱私指數。針對會議室中之空氣品質控制設計之場景的環境因素之一實例包括1000 ppm之CO 2含量。 公共辦公室、門廳或社交場所一般係指建築物之主要人流彙集處之動態、社交環境,其中混合及連接優先於隱私或工作輸出。針對公共辦公室、門廳或社交場所中之視覺舒適性設計之場景的環境因素之一實例包括500勒克斯至1500勒克斯(高)之亮度級及4000K至6000K (中等)之色溫。針對公共辦公室、門廳或社交場所中之熱舒適性設計之場景的環境因素之一實例為22℃至25℃ (中等)之亮度級。針對公共辦公室、門廳或社交場所中之聲舒適性設計之場景的環境因素之一實例包括55 dB至70 dB之聲級及25%之隱私指數。針對公共辦公室、門廳或社交場所中之空氣品質控制設計之場景的環境因素之一實例包括1500 ppm至3000 ppm之CO 2含量。 27為繪示設計及維持在工作場所中提供佔用者滿意度及各種舒適性等級(諸如,例如,視覺舒適性、熱舒適性、聲舒適性及空氣品質)之環境因素之場景的方法之控制邏輯之流程圖 2700。該控制邏輯可藉由一或多個控制器執行。工作場所可為建築物中之房間或房間中之區域。在操作 2710中,該控制邏輯接收來自佔用者、建築物內之資產或建築物系統(諸如,例如,用於控制工作場所中之一或多個可著色窗之著色狀態的窗控制器、HVAC系統、用於控制人工照明(內部及/或外部)之照明系統、安全系統、一或多個感測器、映射系統、雜訊及聲音控制系統等)之回饋。舉例而言,可自佔用者隨身攜帶之資產(諸如智慧電話或其他智慧裝置)接收回饋。作為另一實例,佔用者可經由智慧裝置、手動控制面板(例如, 23中所示之裝置)或其他裝置來將回饋輸入至控制邏輯。可藉由該控制邏輯使用之回饋的一些實例包括工作場所中之一或多個可著色窗的當前著色狀態、關於一或多個佔用者在工作場所中之存在或可能存在的資料、環境光之照度及顏色之量測結果或其他感測器讀數、佔用者資料、環境溫度資料、空氣品質資料、雜訊或其他聲資料、關於可用建築物系統之資訊等。在一個態樣中,可藉由一或多個模組之預測性控制邏輯(諸如參考 22所闡述)來判定該一或多個可著色窗之著色狀態。佔用者資料之一些實例包括年齡、性別、職業、晝夜節律、活動、生命徵象等。在一個態樣中,該控制邏輯使用生命徵象來判定佔用者之晝夜節律。參考 16 18詳細地闡述了建築物系統之一些實例。參考 15 19 20詳細地闡述了窗控制器之一些實例。通常經由通信網路來接收來自建築物系統之回饋。 基於在操作 2710中接收到之回饋,該控制邏輯判定佔用( 2720),包括一或多個佔用者在工作場所中之存在及位置。該控制邏輯可基於資訊,諸如當前時間、排程資料、感測器資料、來自佔用者之輸入、來自佔用者隨身攜帶之資產的信號中之資料及來自映射系統之資料,來判定佔用。在一個態樣中,可使用建築物中射頻、微波或其他電磁波之發射器及接收器的映射系統來映射工作場所中存在之佔用者及其他物件之當前位置。在2017年9月19日提交且標題為「WINDOW ANTENNAS FOR EMITTING RADIO FREQUENCY SIGNALS」之美國專利申請案15/709,339中闡述基於窗天線之此類映射系統的實例,該申請案特此以引用方式整體併入。在另一態樣中,該控制邏輯可基於排程資料及當前時間來判定佔用者有很高之機率係在該工作場所中。在另一態樣中,特定佔用者隨身攜帶之資產(例如,行動電話)具有發射器,該發射器發送在建築物中之接收器處被接收之射頻信號。基於接收到之信號,建築物管理系統或其他控制器判定佔用者之存在及位置且將具有此資訊之信號傳送給實施該控制邏輯之控制器。 在操作 2730中,該控制邏輯開發用於特定佔用者及/或工作場所之使用案例。該使用案例包括以下一或多者:工作場所中之佔用的類型、工作場所中之活動的類型、工作場所之類型、周圍環境之暫時組成、佔用者停留之持續時間、任何建築物考慮因素(諸如能量節約)、建築物系統或可用於改變環境因素之其他技術的控制之類型及可用性。佔用之類型包括多種資訊,諸如一或多個佔用者之年齡、性別、職業、晝夜節律及生命徵象。活動之類型可為(例如)工作、塗刷、畫畫、會客、進餐、私人思考、睡覺、休息、閒逛、等候、聚集等。周圍環境之暫時組成包括多種參數,諸如環境光之照度及顏色、對比率、雜訊、溫度、濕度及空氣品質。 在操作 2740中,該控制邏輯針對該使用案例判定被設計用於提高工作場所中之佔用者滿意度及舒適性(例如,視覺、熱、聲及/或空氣品質)的環境因素之場景。在一個態樣中,除了佔用者滿意度及舒適性之外,亦將建築物考慮因素納入考慮。該控制邏輯至少部分基於建築物系統或可用於改變周圍環境之其他技術的類型及控制來判定該場景中將包括哪些環境因素。在一個態樣中,該控制邏輯在判定是否包括雜訊及空氣品質因素時亦考慮停留持續時間。舉例而言,若停留持續時間小於5分鐘,則該控制邏輯可能不包括雜訊及空氣品質環境因素。對於該場景中之每一環境因素,該控制邏輯判定目標設置或等級。將環境因素分組到多個類別中,包括,例如,熱設置、視覺設置、聲設置及空氣品質設置。熱設置之實例包括溫度、氣流及濕度之目標等級。視覺設置之一些實例包括環境光之照度及顏色、對比率及炫光之目標等級。舉例而言,對比率之目標等級可為保持低於最大可接受對比率或為可接受範圍內之值。聲設置包括聲級或雜訊級及隱私指數,該隱私指數為房間中之牆壁及開放空間之因素。隱私指數反映了在工作場所中具有會話保密性之能力。空氣品質設置之一些實例包括(例如) CO 2及/或一或多種污染物(諸如CO、O 3、NO 2、SO 2、PM 10、PM 2.5及鉛)之含量。在上文提供了針對各種類型之工作場所包括亮度級(照度)、色溫、聲級、隱私指數及空氣品質之目標環境因素的場景之一些實例。 該控制邏輯藉由將特定使用案例之全部或大多數參數與與儲存於資料庫中之場景相關聯之使用案例匹配來判定該特定使用案例之環境因素的場景。若該資料庫不具有匹配場景,則控制邏輯初始化該場景之環境因素。在一個實例中,該控制邏輯使用來自業界最好之實踐之資料來初始化特定使用案例之場景的環境因素。在另一實例中,該控制邏輯(例如)藉由詢問佔用者以獲得較佳環境設置來使用來自佔用者之資料來初始化場景。在另一實例中,該控制邏輯使用來自具有該使用案例中之一組類似參數之佔用者的資料來初始化場景。在一個實施方案中,在該控制邏輯判定特定使用案例之環境因素的第一場景之後,該控制邏輯基於來自具有未預料到之設置之建築物的額外回饋來進一步修改環境因素以產生第二場景,該等設置提供更好地匹配或超過佔用者對工作場所設置之預期的非直觀「樂事」。將在操作 2740中判定之場景保存至資料庫。 在一個態樣中,基於來自佔用者、建築物系統、建築物管理系統、業界及任何其他合適回饋源之回饋來修改特定使用案例之場景。舉例而言,該控制邏輯可接收來自佔用者的關於特定場景之環境等級的超控或正面或負面回饋。該控制邏輯可基於該回饋來判定場景之環境因素的新等級。 在操作 2750中,該控制邏輯判定各種建築物系統之控制設置,該等控制設置將產生在操作 2740中針對佔用者或工作場所設計之場景的目標環境等級。舉例而言,該控制邏輯可使用查找表來判定將產生目標環境因素之適當控制設置。 在操作 2760中,該控制邏輯將該等控制設置傳送至各種建築物系統建築物系統之控制器或建築物管理系統或建築物管控系統。該控制邏輯接著返回至操作 2710。 雖然在本文中相對於獨立地控制多區可著色窗之多個著色區來闡述某些實施例,但將理解,類似技術可應用於控制可著色窗組中之多個可著色窗(多區或單區)。舉例而言,建築物可具有在建築物之立面上或房間中之可著色窗的總成。本文中闡述之技術可用於獨立地控制該總成之可著色窗。亦即,每一可著色窗可具有一或多個著色區,且該等技術獨立地控制該總成中之可著色窗的著色區。 應理解,可使用電腦軟體以模組化或整合方式將如上文所闡述之本發明實施為控制邏輯之形式。基於本文中提供之揭示內容及教示,熟習此項技術者將知道及瞭解用於使用硬體及硬體與軟體之組合來實施本發明的其他方式及/或方法。 可使用(例如)習知或物件導向技術使用任何合適之電腦語言,諸如,例如,Java、C++或Python來將本申請案中闡述之軟體組件或功能中之任一者實施為將藉由處理器執行之軟體程式碼。該軟體程式碼可作為一連串指令或命令儲存於電腦可讀媒體上,諸如隨機存取記憶體(RAM)、唯讀記憶體(ROM)、磁媒體(諸如硬碟或軟磁碟)或光媒體(諸如CD-ROM)。任何此類電腦可讀媒體可駐留於單個計算設備之上或之內,且可存在於系統或網路內之不同計算設備之上或之內。 雖然已稍詳細地闡述了前文揭示之實施例以方便理解,但所闡述之實施例將被視為說明性而非限制。熟習此項技術者將顯而易見,可在所附申請專利範圍之範疇內實踐某些改變及修改。 在不脫離本揭示案之範疇的情況下,來自任何實施例之一或多個特徵可與任何其他實施例之一或多個特徵組合。另外,在不脫離本揭示案之範疇的情況下,可對任何實施例進行修改、添加或省去。在不脫離本揭示案之範疇的情況下,可根據特定需要而將任何實施例之組件整合或分開。 In the following description, numerous specific details are set forth in order to provide a thorough understanding of the presented embodiments. The disclosed embodiments may be practiced without some or all of these specific details. In other instances, well known control operations have not been described in detail so as not to unnecessarily obscure the disclosed embodiments. While the disclosed embodiments will be described in conjunction with specific embodiments, it will be understood that no limitation of the disclosed embodiments is intended. Certain embodiments set forth herein, although not so limited, are particularly suitable for use in electrochromic devices. Certain embodiments are described with respect to techniques for controlling one or more tintable windows or controlling tinted regions in a multi-region window. It will be appreciated that these techniques may also be used to tint individual windows in groups (or zones) of tintable windows, in multi-zone windows, or combinations of such windows. Additionally or alternatively, these techniques can be used to control various building systems, including systems with one or more tintable windows. I. Introduction to tintable windows Certain implementations set forth herein relate to controlling tinting and other functions of tintable windows (eg, electrochromic windows). In some embodiments, the tintable window is in the form of an insulating glass unit comprising two or more panes and a spacer sealed between the panes. Each tintable window has at least one tintable window/pane with an optically switchable device. Some examples are set forth herein with respect to a tintable window having an electrochromic window with an electrochromic device disposed on a transparent substrate such as glass. In one embodiment, an electrochromic window has a monolithic electrochromic device disposed on at least a portion of the substrate that is in the visible region of the tintable window. A detailed example of a method of making an electrochromic window with multiple tinting zones can be found in U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 14/137,644, entitled "Multi-Zone EC Windows," and filed March 13, 2013 (issued as No. 9,341,912), which application is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. As mentioned above, some of the techniques discussed herein are related to controlling the functionality of tintables (eg, in one-zone and/or multi-zone windows) and/or controlling other systems in a building. - Resistive Zones in Multi-Zone Window Some of the techniques discussed herein relate to independently controlling each of the tinted (or tinted) zones in a multi-zone tintable window, such as a multi-zone electrochromic window. "Resistive region" (also sometimes referred to herein as "resistive region") generally refers to a region in an electrochromic device in which the function of one or more layers of the electrochromic device is impaired (partially or completely), but the device function is not cut off across the resistive zone. In one embodiment, the colored regions of an electrochromic window are defined by resistive regions between adjacent colored regions by the technique used to apply potentials to the electrochromic device to independently control the coloring in the colored regions. For example, a single set of bus bars or multiple sets of different bus bars can be configured to independently apply a potential to each colored region to thereby selectively color it. With respect to the resistive region mentioned above, this region allows independently controllable coloring of adjacent colored regions of a single monolithic electrochromic device without compromising the coloring functionality in the resistive region itself. That is, the resistive area can be colored. One advantage of these techniques is that scribe lines are not used to cut the electrochromic device between colored regions. These scribe lines may create non-functional areas of the electrochromic device that may produce visually perceivable bright lines in the visible area of the window when tinted. Instead, the resistive region can have a gentle gradient of coloring between adjacent colored regions that remain in different colored states. This color gradient blends the color transitions between adjacent colored regions to soften the appearance of the transition regions between the colored regions. In some examples, the multi-region window has resistive regions in the region between adjacent colored regions of the monolithic electrochromic device. These resistive areas allow for a more uniformly colored front surface, for example when used in conjunction with bus bar power delivery schemes. In some examples, the resistive regions are relatively narrow, having a width between about 1 mm and 1000 nm wide, or relatively wide, having a width between about 1 mm and about 10 mm wide. In most cases, the electrochromic material in the resistive area is colored such that it does not leave the bright line contrast effect that conventional laser isolated scribe lines typically leave. Thus, in other examples, the resistive region may be wider than 1 mm, wider than 10 mm, wider than 15 mm, etc., for example. The reason the resistive region can be colored is because instead of physically bifurcating the electrochromic device into two devices, it physically modifies a single electrochromic device and/or its associated transparent conductor within the resistive region. A resistive region is a region of an electrochromic device in which the activity of the device, specifically the resistivity and/or resistance to ion movement, is greater than the rest of the electrochromic device. Thus, one or both of the transparent conductors can be modified to have increased resistivity in the resistive region, and/or the electrochromic device stack can be modified such that ions move in the resistive region relative to the adjacent colored region The stacking of electrochromic devices is slower. In this resistive region, the electrochromic device still operates, coloring and decolorizing, but at a slower rate and/or with less tinting intensity relative to the rest of the electrochromic device. For example, a resistive region can be colored as fully as the rest of the electrochromic device in an adjacent colored region, but the resistive region is colored much slower than the adjacent colored region. In another example, a resistive region may not be as fully colored as an adjacent colored region, or colored in a gradient of coloring. U.S. Patent Application 15/039,370, filed May 25, 2016, entitled "MULTI-ZONE EC WINDOWS" and International PCT Application, filed December 18, 2014, entitled "MULTI-ZONE EC WINDOWS" Details of the resistive regions and other features of multi-zone electrochromic windows are set forth in PCT/US14/71314, both of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety. II. Shading Considerations The motivation for controlling the tint state of one or more tintable windows and other building systems is for the good of occupants and/or solely for building considerations, such as energy savings, power requirements, and the like. Here, "occupant" generally refers to one or more individuals in a particular room or other space where one or more tintable windows are controlled, and "building" generally refers to the building management system (BMS) and lighting , HVAC and other building systems. Motivations related to occupancy include, for example, overall health as may be affected by the lighting in a room and the aesthetics of a tinted window or group of tinted windows. Motives include, for example, control of glare from direct sunlight hitting the occupant's workplace, visibility through the window to the exterior of the building (its "view"), tintable window colors, and associated The color of light, and the thermal comfort obtained by adjusting the coloring state to block direct sunlight from entering the room or to transmit direct sunlight into the room. While occupants may want to largely avoid glare reaching their workplace, they may also want to allow some sunlight to pass through the windows for natural lighting. This may be the case when occupants prefer sunlight to artificial lighting from, for example, incandescent, light emitting diode (LED) or fluorescent lighting. Additionally, it has been found that certain tintable windows may impart too much blue to a room in their darker tinted state. This blue color can be offset by allowing a portion of unfiltered daylight into the room and/or by artificial lighting. User motivations related to buildings include reducing energy use through reductions in heating, air conditioning, and lighting. For example, one may want to tint a window so that a certain amount of sunlight is transmitted through the window so that less energy is required for artificial lighting and/or heating. We may also want to harvest sunlight to harvest solar energy and compensate for heating needs. Another consideration, perhaps common to building managers and occupants, has to do with safety issues. In this regard, it may be desirable for the windows to be tinted darker so that occupants cannot be seen by those outside the room. Alternatively, it may be desirable for the window to be clear so that, for example, neighbors or the police outside the building can see inside the building to identify any malicious activity. For example, a user or building operator can put a window into an "emergency mode," which in one instance clears the window. a. glare control In many cases, glare avoidance can be the reason for as much as 95% of tinting decisions for tintable windows. The approach to making tinting decisions for tintable windows taking into account glare avoidance is described in detail in International PCT Application No. PCT/US15/29675, filed May 7, 2015 and entitled "CONTROL METHOD FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS" For example, this application is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. In these methods, glare is addressed in the operation of Logic Module A using proprietary control logic trademarked under the name Intelligence® (manufactured by View, Inc. of Milpitas, California). In module A, a decision is made whether to adjust the tint state of a tintable window based on the depth of penetration or area of glare caused by solar radiation entering the room through the window. If the penetration depth or glare area in which solar radiation hits the room overlaps with the occupant's position or likely position (occupancy area), the tintable windows in the façade remain in or transition to a darker tinting state in order to reduce this occupancy area of glare. Existing algorithms tint, for example, an entire set of windows associated with a building space based on glare at the expense of other user comfort considerations. The methods herein address glare by independently tinting individual tinting zones of one or more windows in a set of tintable windows and/or one or more multi-zone windows, for example, while also allowing natural daylight to enter the space And thus provides granularity and flexibility to tinting decisions by simultaneously addressing multiple occupant comfort issues and/or building system requirements. For example, reducing glare is a goal that is often at odds with reducing a building's heating load, increasing natural lighting, and the like. In winter, for example, the energy used by the heating system to heat a room can be reduced by clearing the tintable window, which may also create glare situation. In certain configurations described herein, a multi-zone tintable window (or individual windows in a group of windows) can be controlled to be tinted by dimming in that window (or a subset of windows in a group of windows) To solve this problem, limit the area of the occupant to those colored areas that reduce glare at the occupant's position or possible position in the room. While many examples are set forth herein with respect to controlling tinting zones in a multi-zone tintable window, it will be understood that similar techniques would apply to assemblies of multiple tintable windows, each tinting window having one or more tinting zones . For example, an assembly of tintable windows can be controlled to limit areas of the window assembly that are placed in darkened tints to within those tintable windows and/or tintable windows that reduce glare on occupied areas. Colored area. b. adjust color vision Other implementations for controlling the tintable window in a particular manner may reduce the color perception of the window in its tinted or decolored state and/or the color perception of the color of light passing through the window in its tinted or decolored state. Such implementations utilize optical properties that minimize the perception of undesired colors associated with particular tint states. As one example, the dimmed colored state of an optically switchable device (eg, an electrochromic device) can have an occupant-perceivable blue color. However, occupants may be less likely to notice the blue color of a tinted window if the tinted window in the room is juxtaposed with a more daylit clear zone window. For example, a particular window may be in a darker tint and may appear blue to occupants. In one embodiment of the glare-reducing tinting configuration, adjacent or adjacent windows can be left clear as long as they do not glare to occupants due to their relative position. Light passing through clear windows reduces the perception of blue that occupants might otherwise perceive. In another embodiment, a diffusing light source, such as a diffusing or scattering film adhered to a tintable window, can reduce the perception of blue in the tinted window. For example, a diffusing or scattering film may be disposed on the counterpart window of an electrochromic window of an IGU. In another example, a diffusing or scattering film may be disposed on the surface of a window without an optically switchable device, such as an electrochromic device. c. light collection Other tinting configurations may involve maximizing light collection. Light harvesting is the concept of converting solar radiation from the outside of a window into electrical energy for use by the window, building, or for other purposes. Light harvesting may be accomplished using photovoltaic films, other photovoltaic structures, or other light harvesting structures on appropriate portions of the window, such as on a mating window of an IGU. In one example, light harvesting is accomplished by photovoltaic cells disposed in or on the electrochromic window. One consideration is that photovoltaic cells or other light harvesting structures may be most effective when the incident light being collected enters in a normal or near normal direction. This can be facilitated by having a structure in the window that redirects light incident on the window so that it strikes the photovoltaic cell in a normal or near normal direction to maximize energy production. In some cases, a light diffuser or horizontal directing structure may be used on one portion of a tintable window to direct light onto a photovoltaic film, other photovoltaic structure, or other light harvesting structure on an appropriate portion of the window, such as on a mating window pane . Another consideration is that it may normally be desirable for the photovoltaic film on the counterpart window to be as transparent as possible. However, photovoltaic films made transparent are often relatively inefficient at converting sunlight to electrical energy compared to less transparent films, or films that are not only opaque but perhaps scatter light to a greater extent. Recognize that in one area of the window there may be certain tinted areas that are generally responsible for preventing glare situations in the room and therefore generally must be tinted, and/or outside this area there may be areas where the occupant would normally be able to view the outside environment certain areas. In one embodiment, the colored regions in this region have a photovoltaic film that is more efficient at light harvesting but more scattering or less transparent than regions outside of this region. In another embodiment, the colored areas in this region have a photovoltaic film, while the regions outside of this region do not have a photovoltaic film. Regarding the situation in which the incident light is directed, reflected, scattered or diffused horizontally in this zone because the upper area of the window produces most of the glare, similarly, according to another embodiment, the upper area of the tintable window may be equipped with more effective, But optically less pleasing type of photovoltaic film. -IGU Exemplary Locations of Photovoltaic Cells on Window Faces In certain embodiments, a tintable window includes photovoltaic (PV) cells/panels. The PV panel can be located anywhere on the window as long as it can absorb solar energy. For example, a PV panel may be located fully or partially in the visible area of the window, and/or fully or partially in/on the frame of the window. Details of examples of electrochromic windows with PV cells/panels can be found in U.S. Provisional Patent Application 62/247,719, entitled "PHOTOVOLTAIC-ELECTROCHROMIC WINDOWS," filed March 25, 2016, which is hereby incorporated by reference The method is integrated as a whole. The PV cell/panel may be implemented as a film covering one or more surfaces of the pane of a tintable window. In certain embodiments, the tintable window is in the form of an IGU having two individual windows (panes), each having two surfaces (not counting the edges). Counting inwards from the exterior of the building, the first surface (i.e. the outward-facing surface of the exterior window panel) may be referred to as Surface 1 (S1), the next surface (i.e. the inward-facing surface of the exterior window panel surface) may be referred to as surface 2 (S2), the next surface (i.e., the outwardly facing surface of the inner window panel) may be referred to as surface 3 (S3), and the remaining surface (i.e., the facing surface of the inner window panel The inner surface) may be referred to as surface 4 (S4). PV thin films may be implemented on any one or more of surfaces 1-4. In certain examples, a PV film is applied to at least one of the surfaces of the windows in an IGU or other multi-pane window assembly. Examples of suitable PV films are commercially available from Next Energy Technologies Inc. of Santa Barbara, CA. In some cases, the PV film can be an organic semiconductive ink and can be printed/coated onto the surface. Conventionally, where PV cells are intended to be used in conjunction with multi-zone electrochromic windows, the EC device is positioned towards the interior of the building relative to the PV cell/panel such that the EC device does not reduce the PV while the EC device is in the tinted state. Energy harvested by battery/panel. Thus, PV cells/panels can be implemented on the outwardly facing surface of the outer window panel (window), eg on the surface 1 of the IGU. However, certain sensitive PV cells cannot be exposed to external environmental conditions and thus cannot be reliably implemented on outward-facing surfaces. For example, PV cells may be sensitive to oxygen and humidity. To address the air and water sensitivity of such PV films, the film can be positioned on surface 2 or 3, thus helping to protect the film from exposure to oxygen and humidity. In some cases, a stack of electrochromic materials is on surface 3 and a PV film is on surface 2 . In another example, a stack of electrochromic materials is on surface 2 and a PV film is on surface 3 . In one aspect, the PV film is on S3 and the multi-zone window has an electrochromic device with multiple colored zones on S2. In such a case, one or more zones may remain in a decolorized state, such as in a daylight tinted zone that allows a high degree of natural light into the room (eg, in a transom window configuration). In this case, sunlight is fed to the PV film on S3, while other areas (eg, lower windows in transom window configurations) can remain tinted, eg, for glare control. In this case, the PV film receives sunlight and does not require light. 4. contrast ratio As used herein, "contrast ratio" refers to the contrast in intensity of light reflected from a surface illuminated by multiple light sources. In most instances the contrast ratio is stated with respect to two regions of the surface illuminated by multiple light sources, referred to as "first part" and "second part". The first portion refers to the area primarily illuminated by the first light source providing illumination with a first intensity. The second portion refers to the area near or around the first portion that is illuminated by light having a second intensity different from the first intensity. In one example, yellow light transmitted through the aperture of an electrochromic window in its darkest tinted state produces a blue light projection on the top surface of a table in a room. The light transmitted through the electrochromic window has a higher intensity than the ambient light illuminating the table top. Before the artificial light is activated, there is an intensity contrast between the blue light reflected from the lightcast on the table in the first portion of the table area illuminated by the ambient light in the room and the adjacent second portion. Subsequently, an artificial light source providing red and yellow light is activated to illuminate the table top. The tabletop reflects light from the blue light projection and red and yellow light from the artificial light source to reflect blue, red and yellow light from the first portion. The tabletop also reflects red and yellow light in a second portion illuminated primarily by artificial light sources. Red and yellow light from artificial lighting can shift or "wash out" the contrast between the light reflected from the first and second portions. picture 1A-1Cdepicts the room according to the implementation 150Schematic diagram of the perspective view of the room with the exterior of the building and the room 150Tinable windows in vertical walls between interiors 160. tintable windows 160In the darkened shaded state as shown. Room 150Also located in the room 150The first artificial light source on a vertical wall 152, second artificial light source 154and a third artificial light source 156. Room 150also has an occupied area 170, for example, a desk or another workplace. In this instance, occupying the area 170defined as a room 150A two-dimensional area on the floor. In one embodiment, the first, second and third artificial light sources 152 , 154 and 156One or more of these may be adjustable artificial lighting that can be adjusted to various settings, such as wavelength range, illuminance, and/or lighting direction. exist picture 1AIn the first case shown in , sunlight (shown as a solid arrow) strikes a tintable window in the tinted state as shown 160. Transmission through tintable windows 160light (shown as a dotted arrow) in the room 150The first part of the floor 162produces a two-dimensional light projection. In this case, turn off the first artificial light source 152, second artificial light source 154and a third artificial light source 156. Ambient light in the room illuminates the room 150in the first part 162Around the second part 180The middle floor. The light transmitted through the tintable window has a higher intensity than the ambient light illuminating the floor. From the brighter first portion illuminated primarily by light transmitted through the tintable window 162The reflected light from and from the second part illuminated primarily by ambient light 180There is an intensity contrast (contrast ratio) of reflected light. In this case, the first part 162with the second part 180The contrast at the interface between is not in the occupied area 170middle. exist picture 1BIn the second case shown in , sunlight (shown as a solid arrow) strikes a tintable window in the tinted state as shown 160, and turn off the first artificial light source 152, second artificial light source 154and a third artificial light source 156. In this second case, the sun is higher in the sky than in the first case. Transmission through tintable windows 160The light (shown as a dotted arrow) produces a two-dimensional light projection that illuminates the room 150The first part of the floor 162. first part 162and occupied area 170overlapping. The light transmitted through the tintable window has a higher intensity than the ambient light illuminating the floor. from the brighter first part mainly illuminated by the light projection 162The reflected light from the first part 162Around the second part 180There is an intensity contrast (contrast ratio) of reflected light. In this case, the first part 162with the second part 180The contrast at the interface between the occupied area 170middle. picture 1CThe third scenario shown in picture 1BThe lighting situation shown in , but with the addition of the first artificial light source depicted by the directional arrow 152start. In this case, the first artificial light source 152Lighting the Floor 2D Part 3 190, offset or "washed out" from picture 1BThe first part shown in 162with the second part 180The contrast between the reflected light. picture 2A-2Bdepicts the room according to the implementation 250Schematic diagram of the perspective view of the room with the exterior of the building and the room 250Tinable windows in vertical walls between interiors 260. tintable windows 260In a darkened shading state. Room 250Also located in the room 250The first artificial light source in a vertical wall 252, second artificial light source 254and a third artificial light source 256. Room 250also has an occupied area 270, for example, a desk or another workplace. In this instance, occupying the area 270defined as a room 250A two-dimensional area on the floor. In one embodiment, the first, second and third artificial light sources 252 , 254 and 256One or more of these may be adjustable artificial lighting that can be adjusted to various settings, such as wavelength range, illuminance, and/or lighting direction. exist picture 2AIn the fourth case shown in , sunlight (shown as a dotted arrow) strikes a tintable window in the tinted state as shown 260. In this fourth case, transmission through the tintable window 260light (shown as a solid arrow) in the room 250tintable windows 260The first part of the vertical wall very close 266produces a two-dimensional light projection. third artificial light source 256Activated and illuminates the second part of the floor 292. the second part 292and occupied area 270overlapping. Transmission through tintable windows 260The light has brighter than the first part 266The third part of the surrounding floor 280The intensity of the ambient light is high. from part two 292with the third part 280There is a contrast in the intensity of the reflected light. picture 2BThe fifth scenario shown in picture 2AA similar lighting situation as shown in , but with the addition of the first artificial light source drawn by the directional arrow 152lighting. In this case, the first artificial light source 1522D part 4 activated and lighting the floor 290, offset from picture 2AThe second part shown in 292with the third part 280The contrast between the reflected light. Certain embodiments relate to control logic that determines and communicates new settings for building systems, such as the tint status of tintable windows, and settings for artificial lighting, wherein the new settings are determined by the control logic to reduce footprint, such as Contrast ratio in a table or other work surface). For example, the control logic may determine the setting of an adjustable artificial light source to tune it to wavelengths of red and yellow light and/or a brighter tinting level for a tintable window to reduce blue in light projection through the tinted window color depth. In this example, a combination of red and yellow light from an artificial light source is combined with blue light projected through a tinted window to produce red, yellow, and blue light, for example, with a spectral content closer to the natural light spectrum. This combination reduces the contrast in color and intensity between areas illuminated primarily by blue light projections and areas illuminated by artificial light sources. In some embodiments, the control logic adjusts the functionality of the building system based on a current contrast ratio in the occupied area, the current contrast ratio being determined based on feedback from the building system. For example, the contrast ratio in an occupied area may be determined based on the current illuminance in the occupied area as determined from one or more of: one or more sensors in the building (e.g., a video camera) , thermal sensors, etc.), the current setting and location of artificial lighting, etc. The illuminance and color of ambient light can be measured using a spectrometer such as, for example, the commercially available C-7000 spectromaster manufactured by Sekonic®. The control logic adjusts the functionality of the building systems to adjust the contrast ratio in the occupied area to an acceptable level. For example, building systems may be adjusted such that the contrast ratio is below an acceptable range or below a maximum limit. As another example, a building system can be tuned so that the contrast ratio is maintained within acceptable levels based on a look-up table of illuminance for artificial lighting that can be used to offset the The reflected light of light projection. Other considerations for controlling the tint state of one or more tintable windows and other building systems for the benefit of occupants and/or for the building alone will be set forth in other sections of this disclosure. For example, occupant health including circadian rhythm adjustment is a consideration discussed below. b. for glare control and / or other considerations for coloring configuration examples Examples of configurations for glare reduction are set forth in this subsection with reference in most cases to multi-zone tintable windows. It will be appreciated that these examples are also similarly applicable to a set of tintable windows or a combination of multi-zone windows and single sheet tintable windows. a) Glare Control by Daylighting In a particular glare reduction configuration, a multi-zone tintable window is controlled to place (remain in or transition to) the dimmed state of the tinted zones at locations within the tintable window that reduce occupants or In areas where glare may be located, simultaneously place the other tinted zones of the multi-zone tintable window in a lighter tinted state to allow ambient light in to eg reduce heating/illumination. This configuration can be used for Daylighting. As used herein, "daylighting" generally refers to the architectural strategy of using natural light to meet lighting requirements and potential color shifts while mitigating occupants' potential visual discomfort (such as, for example, caused by glare). Glare can come from direct sunlight falling on an occupant's workplace or into an occupant's eyes. This configuration and other daylighting examples set forth herein can provide a variety of benefits, including a reduction in blue from light in shaded areas due to changes in visual perception due to increased natural light in the room. As mentioned above, it will be appreciated that these examples also apply similarly to remaining in or transitioning to darken one or more tintable windows while the other tintable windows remain in a lighter tinted state to achieve daylighting. - Brighter shading in lower areas In this configuration, a multi-zone tintable window or group of tintable windows is controlled such that lower areas are brighter than other areas. In one example of this glare control configuration, the lower tinted zone of a multi-zone window in a vertical wall is controlled to be tinted brighter than one or more of the upper tinted windows in the multi-zone window. As another example of such a glare control configuration, a lower tintable window in a vertical wall is controlled to be tinted brighter than one or more upper tintable windows in the vertical wall. For example, at an angle where the sun is in a middle to high position in the sky and this lower area can be at a low position such that direct sunlight does not penetrate deeply into the room and thus does not create glare in the occupied area located near the window In the case of receiving sunlight, this control configuration can be used. In such a case, the lower area can be cleared or controlled in a way that allows the most light into the room and minimizes the heat load required to heat the room, while the middle and/or top areas can be darkened to Reduces glare on occupied areas. - Brighter shading in the top area In this configuration, a multi-zone tintable window or group of tintable windows is controlled such that the top areas are brighter than the lower areas. For example, a tinted zone (or tinted zones at the top) can be tinted brighter than one or more tinted zones of the multi-zone tintable window or the top region of the window. In another example, the top region of the window may have only a transparent substrate (no optically switchable device). As another example, an upper tintable window in a top region of a vertical wall is controlled to tint brighter than one or more other tintable windows in the vertical wall. In these instances, the brighter top area can function in a similar manner to a "transom window" by allowing a high degree of natural ambient light to enter the room while controlling glare near vertical walls. This and other lighting examples set forth herein can provide a variety of benefits, including a reduction in blue from light passing through tinted areas/windows due to changes in visual perception due to increased natural light in the room. picture 3For a multi-zone tintable window according to an embodiment 300A schematic diagram of this example, the multi-zone tintable window has five tinting zones. Multi-Zone Tinable Windows 300Between the interior and exterior of a building, in a room 350outside the vertical wall. Multi-Zone Tinable Windows 300included in the window 300The first colored region at the top of 302and in the first shaded area 302Four other colored areas below 304, 306, 308and 310. exist picture 3In the illustrated situation shown in , the sun is high in the sky. In this case, the shaded regions are controlled such that the first shaded region 302In the first colored state, that is, the brightest colored state (for example, decolorized or clear state), and the other colored regions 304, 306, 308and 310In a second colored state that is darker than the first colored state. For the shader control configuration shown, the first shader 302Allows natural light from the sun overhead to enter the room while preventing glare from direct sunlight projecting onto the occupied area with the table and occupants. Instead, passing through the first colored zone 302The direct sunlight casts glare (depicted by arrows) onto unoccupied areas of the room. Although five zones are used in the example shown here, other numbers and arrangements of colored zones may be used. In another example of this glare configuration, a multi-zone tintable window may include only a top transparent substrate portion without an optical device and a bottom portion with an optically switchable device having one or more tinting zones . For example, the multi-zone tintable window may have a monolithic electrochromic device with one or more tinting zones at the bottom portion of the window and a strip of light-emitting transparent substrate at the top. In another example of this glare configuration, and possibly other configurations for other purposes, according to one embodiment, a multi-zone tintable window includes one or more tinting zones, the one or more tinting zones being controllable area so that it has a color gradient from one side to the opposite side. In one instance, the top tinted region has a tinting gradient starting in a depigmented tinted state on one side and increasing tinting towards the opposite side. That is, there are no sudden changes in coloration as in physically separate regions where high contrast between regions may be distracting and unattractive to the end user. picture 4For a multi-zone tintable window according to an embodiment 460A schematic diagram of this example, the multi-zone tintable window has a tinting gradient. Multi-Zone Tinable Windows 460Located between the interior and exterior of a building, a room 450outside the vertical wall. Multi-Zone Tinable Windows 460included in the window 450The first colored region at the top of 462and in the first shaded area 462Second colored area below 464. In the diagram shown, the first colored area 462In a first colored state, the first colored state is the brightest colored state (e.g., a bleached state), and the second colored region 464In a second colored state that is darker than the first colored state. For the coloring shown, the first coloring zone 462Natural light from the overhead sun is allowed into the room while preventing glare from direct sunlight projecting onto the illustrated occupancy area with a table and seated occupants. through the first coloring zone 462The direct sunlight casts glare (indicated by the arrow) onto the unoccupied area at the rear of the room. In this particular instance, the multi-zone tintable window 460Also has shaded gradient areas 466, the colored gradient area includes a resistance area with a width. Shading Gradient Areas 466having the first colored area adjacent to the 462with the second colored area 464A shading gradient between shading states. That is, the shading gradient distance (or width) can be measured, for example, from the beginning of a region where %T begins to change, through and including the change in %T towards an adjacent region, where %T becomes constant in the second region where it ends. In one aspect, the width of the gradient portion is about 10”. In another aspect, the width of the gradient portion is in the range of 2” to 15”. In another aspect, the width of the gradient portion The width is in the range of 10" to 15". In one aspect, the width of the gradient portion is about 5". In one aspect, the width of the gradient portion is about 2”. In one aspect, the width of the gradient portion is about 15”. In one aspect, the width of the gradient portion is about 20”. In one aspect, the width of the gradient portion is about 20”. In one aspect, the width of the gradient portion is at least about 10”. In one aspect, the width of the gradient portion is at least about 16”. In one aspect, the width of the gradient portion covers the entire or substantially the entire width of the multi-zone tintable window. In such a case, the window may have a continuous gradient from light to dark across the entire window. In another aspect, the width of the gradient portion is less than 5 inches. - Intermediate area of lighter coloration While some instances of shading for tintable windows in a glare reduction configuration have the top or lower areas in a lighter tint state, other instances darken the top or lower areas to control glare while keeping the top area and One or more intermediate areas between the bottom areas become clear or leave them in a lighter state of pigment. In this case, a multi-zone tintable window or a group of tintable windows can be controlled such that the middle area of one or more tinted areas/windows is brighter than the other areas. For example, a multi-zone tintable window located very low or very high in a room may have a tint configuration that clears or places a middle zone or zones in a lighter tint state. As another example, a single multi-zone tintable window spanning multiple floors (eg, an open mezzanine or attic in a single room) can have a tinting configuration that clears a middle zone or zones. As another example, one or more tintable windows in the middle region of a vertical wall are controlled to be tinted brighter than other tintable windows in the vertical wall. picture 5for having three tintable windows according to an aspect 502, 504and 506the room 550schematic diagram. The room has a second mezzanine with two tables and a lower floor with a single table. tintable windows 502, 504and 506Arranged vertically and between the interior and exterior of the building, between rooms 550outside the vertical wall. In this illustration, the middle tintable window 504In a first tinting state (e.g., a de-tinting state), and other tintable windows 502and 506In a second shading state that is darker than the first shading state. For tinting shown, intermediate tintable windows 504Allows natural light from the sun to enter the room 550Place between occupied areas to reduce lighting/heating loads. This tinting also prevents glare from direct sunlight falling on occupied areas on the mezzanine and lower floors. While many examples of multi-zone tintable windows in glare-reducing configurations are described herein with respect to multiple full-width tinting zones positioned along the length of the window, other examples may include multiple tinted zones positioned along the width of the window. Full length tinted area. Alternatively, it is contemplated that a multi-zone tintable window may include rectangular tinting zones (digital design) corresponding to a two-dimensional array of locations across the length and width of the window. b) window with multiple panes In certain embodiments, a tintable window includes a plurality of panes in the form of, for example, an insulating glass unit (IGU) with spacers sealed between the panes. Another example is a laminated construction. Any of the tinting configurations shown and described herein with respect to the examples shown may be used for a single window or one or more windows of an IGU or laminate construction. In a glare-reducing tinting configuration, a tintable window includes a first tintable window combined with a second paired window having multiple tinting regions or a single tinting region. In this tinted configuration, the combined transmission of light passing through multiple windows can be used to provide a lower transmission than a single window. For example, the reduced transmittance level of two tintable windows through the region where the two windows are tinted to the darkest tinted state may be below 1% T. This reduced transmittance through areas of multiple tinted windows combined can be used to provide increased glare control in multi-zone tintable windows. That is, a transmission of less than 1% may be desired by some end users, for example, to further reduce glare. In such cases, tintable windows with multiple windows can be used to reduce transmission below 1% if desired. In one embodiment of this tinting configuration, a multi-zone tintable window is in the form of an IGU having multiple windows, each window having one or more tinting zones that can be tinted to reduce glare. At certain times of the year/day, the tinting of the upper area of the window is appropriate because the sun is at a certain height such that sunlight passing through the upper area is a glare passing through all parts of the window receiving sunlight The main reason. In other cases, other areas of the multi-zone tintable window may also benefit from this tinting. For example, the lower part may also benefit from this coloring. According to one aspect, the areas of a multi-zone window determined by the control method to be most suitable for tinting to reduce glare are those areas where occupants do not have good visual potential. In other words, it is desirable if the occupant can see out of the window when they are where they would normally be in the room, for example, to check weather conditions. In one example, the control method determines to maintain or transition the tint state of certain tinted areas to a darker tinted state to control glare on occupied areas as long as such areas of tinted areas do not block the occupant's view . In certain embodiments, a multi-zone tintable window in the form of an IGU is controlled to have a tinting state that balances glare control with reduced energy consumption. In one instance, the IGU's mating window may have one or more tinted regions designed to always or almost always reduce glare. While a mating window generally refers to any substrate of an IGU, in one instance, a mating window is a substrate of an IGU that does not have an optically switchable device (eg, an electrochromic device) thereon. c) Direction Control of Sunlight In one aspect, the paired windows in the IGU, or perhaps some other structure, can be designed to direct sunlight in the horizontal direction regardless of the relative height of the sun relative to the window position. The mechanism for directing light in the horizontal direction may include a set of very thin slats or louver structures inside or outside the IGU or associated with a mating window. In one example, a small mechanical shutter can be built into the electrically controllable area of the mating window to redirect light. As another example, a series of light pipes may reside outside or inside the IGU (the area between the windows) to direct sunlight in a substantially horizontal direction. picture 6for the room according to an embodiment 699Multi-zone tintable windows in the form of IGUs in vertical walls of 690A schematic diagram of an example. The IGU includes inner and outer EC windows and spacers (not shown) between the windows. The inner EC window includes a first tinted zone 693, the second coloring area 696and the third coloring area 697. Outer EC window includes first tinted zone 694and the second colored area 698. at the window 690the top part 692, the area between the windows 695There is a series of light pipes including reflective inner surfaces for transmitting light. In other embodiments, the region 695Light scattering elements, reflectors, diffusers, microshrouds (or similar MEMS devices) or the like may be included. In this shaded configuration, make the shaded area 693and 694Clear to allow sunlight to pass through while directing light or preventing light from hitting occupants and thus avoiding glare situations, while still allowing natural light to enter the space. In this configuration, sunlight passes through the 692Colored area at the outer surface of the EC window 694, transmitted through the light pipes, and transmitted through the colored area of the EC window in the clear state 693. In some cases, the light may be directed slightly to the back of the room as shown. For the shaded configuration shown, the window 690the top part 692Allows natural light from the sun at an elevated position to enter the room while preventing glare from direct sunlight on occupied areas with tables and occupants. In another embodiment, one or more windows of the IGU may have an area with a diffuse light source such that the light impinging on this area is diffused or scattered to eliminate potential glare on the occupied area. Diffusion or scattering can be achieved by applying a diffusing or light directing film to the area. These films contain many scattering centers or other channels to allow light in but at the same time reduce direct light on the occupied area. d) have non EC Membrane multi-zone window In certain embodiments, the tintable window includes an electrochromic device or other optically switchable device. In one embodiment, the tintable window includes an optically switchable device and a photovoltaic film. In another implementation, a tintable window includes an optically switchable device and a layer of thermochromic material and/or a layer of photochromic material. Some illustrations of tintable windows with thermochromic or photochromic materials can be found in U.S. Patent Application No. 12/2008, entitled "MULTI-PANE DYNAMIC WINDOW AND METHOD FOR MAKING SAME," filed June 25, 2008. 145,892 (now US Patent No. 8,514,476), which application is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. e) Other Examples of Lighting and Shading Configurations Certain aspects relate to tinting configurations having at least one tinting region or tintable window (daylighting tinting region/window) that remains in a decolorized tinted state. Daylighting tinting areas/windows allow natural light to enter the room while controlling glare/temperature in the room by tinting other tinting areas/windows. These aspects are aimed at motivation from occupants/buildings. First, daylight tinted areas/windows increase room light. That is, a darker tinting state may make the occupant feel that the room is too dark. Occupants may want to let more light into the room while still controlling glare when the sun is shining on the façade. Second, daylight tinting areas/windows can improve the color of light in a room. That is, a darker tinting state can make the light in the room appear colored (eg, blue). Occupants may want to maintain a more natural room color while tinting to control glare. Third, the lighting and tinting area/window can improve the vision through the window and the occupant's connection with the outside world. An occupant may want to recognize current weather or other outdoor conditions when the window is in a darker tint state. Fourth, daylight tinted areas/windows maintain glare/heat control. That is, other tinted areas/windows will be tinted to protect occupants from glare and heat from solar radiation. In certain aspects, the daylight tinting zones of the multi-zone window are wide enough to allow enough natural light to enter the room to reduce light color (eg, blue) in the room while still providing glare/heating control. In one aspect, the width of the daylighting tinted zone is about 5". In another aspect, the width of the daylighting tinted zone is less than 22". In another aspect, the width of the daylighting tinted region is between about 10" and 21". In one aspect, the width of the daylighting tinted zone is about 15". picture 7A first multi-zone tintable window showing aspects according to a daylighting tinting configuration 712left room 710and has a second multi-zone tintable window 732right side room 730. room on the left 710The first multi-zone tintable window 712Has two shaded zones above the level of the sill. room on the right 730The second multi-zone tintable window 732There are three shaded zones above the level of the sill. The first multi-zone tintable windows 712with second multi-zone tintable windows 732In , the lower part below the level of the sill is not shadeable. In one case, the lower portion may be a transparent substrate without optically switchable devices. in two rooms 710, 730, the top shaded area is shown clear to allow daylight to pass through the shaded area into the room, which is the same as picture 3Similar to the transom window example shown in . First multi-zone tintable window with two tinting zones 712May have lower manufacturing and design complexity than three-zone windows. picture 8AIncluding one embodiment of the daylighting shader configuration according to the description in the room 800Plan and side (south elevation) views of a modeled building with several tintable multi-zone windows in . picture 8Binclude figure 8ARoom of the modeled building shown in 800perspective view. Each multi-zone window has two tinting zones, a first top tinting zone and a second middle tinting zone. The lower area is a transparent substrate without optically switchable devices. In the example shown, the upper tinted zone is brighter than the middle tinted zone to allow daylight to enter the room through the upper tinted zone. picture 9According to an embodiment, on June 21st, September 21st and December 21st from passing through picture 7Graph of the Daylight Glare Probability (DGP) for the 1st and 2nd row seats in the room for the multi-zone windows shown in . This multi-zone window has two shaded zones. picture 10for relative to picture 9Graph of indoor light levels in footcandles (FC) at table level on June 21, September 21, and December 21 for two shaded zones in the illustrated room. picture 11for picture 7A diagram of the tinting schedule for a two-zone tintable window shown in , including illuminance levels and DGP values. As shown, adequate glare control and daylighting is provided to the shaded area for a period of time. The darkest shading state (shading 4) is required in the middle of the year-end day. picture 12A plot of the shading schedule for a multi-zone window with two zones and a multi-zone window with three zones. Three zones provide more coloring options than two zones. Lower vision can only be sometimes tinted to slightly reduce glare but not affect light levels. picture 13Diagram showing a simulation of two views of a room with multi-zone tintable windows with daylighting tinting zones with a width of 15". picture 14Graph showing green-blue tinting and brightness in a simulated room with a daylighting tinting zone of width 5". The first 5" of the daylighting zone's width results in the largest incremental difference in room color. One embodiment is a method of providing daylight to a room having a tintable window between the room space and the exterior of the room, the method comprising allowing at least 5" of the length of the window to be untinted while allowing less tinting of the remainder of the length of the tintable window. 5% of the solar spectrum is transmitted through it. III. controller In some embodiments, one or more controllers may provide power or send other control signals to building systems to control the functions of those building systems. In some cases, for example, the controller may power one or more electrochromic devices of the tintable window. The controllers described herein are not limited to those controllers having the function of powering a device (or devices) with which they are associated for control. That is, the power supply can be separate from the controller, where the controller has its own power supply and directs the application of power to the device(s) from an independent power supply. However, it is convenient to include a power supply with the controller and configure the controller to directly power the device because it eliminates the need for separate wiring for powering the device. In some cases, a controller is a stand-alone controller configured to control the function of a single system, such as an electrochromic window or region of an electrochromic window or a plurality of electrochromic devices, and There is no need to integrate the controller into the building control network or building management system (BMS). In other cases, as further described in this subsection, the controller is integrated into the building control network or BMS. a. Instance of the controller component picture 15display controller 1550Some of the components and through the controller 1550Devices for controlled building systems 1500A simplified block diagram of . Further details of similar controller components implemented to control optically switchable devices can be found in U.S. Patent Application Nos. 13/449,248 and 13, both filed April 17, 2012, entitled "CONTROLLER FOR OPTICALLY-SWITCHABLE WINDOWS" /449,251 and in U.S. Patent Application 13/449,235, entitled "CONTROLLING TRANSITIONS IN OPTICALLY SWITCHABLE DEVICES," filed April 17, 2012 (published as U.S. Patent No. 8,705,162); all of which are hereby incorporated by reference The method is integrated as a whole. exist picture 15in the controller 1550The components shown include the microprocessor 1555or other processors, pulse width modulators 1560(PWM), signal conditioning module 1565and has a configuration file 1575computer readable media (e.g. memory) 1570. controller 1550via network 1580(wired or wireless) with one or more devices 1500electronically communicate to the one or more devices 1500Send control commands. In some embodiments, the controller 1550Can be a local controller communicating with the main controller via a network (wired or wireless). In some embodiments, the output from the sensor can be input to a signal conditioning module 1565. This input can be presented to a signal conditioning block 1 565The form of the voltage signal. Signal Conditioning Module 1565Pass the output signal to the microprocessor 1555or other processors. microprocessor 1555or other processors based on various sources such as from configuration files 1575information from the signal conditioning module 1565output, override value or other data to determine the control level of the device(s). microprocessor 1555Next to the PWM 1560send commands over the network 1580Apply voltage and/or current to one or more devices in a building system to control its function. In one instance, the microprocessor 1555PWM can be indicated 1560A voltage and/or current is applied to the electrochromic device of the window to switch it to any of four or more different colored states. In one instance, the electrochromic device is switchable to at least eight different coloration levels set forth as: 0 (brightest), 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, and 35 (darkest). These tinting levels may correspond linearly to values of visual transmittance and solar heat gain coefficient (SHGC) of light transmitted through the electrochromic window. For example, using the above eight shading levels, the brightest shading level 0 may correspond to a SHGC value of 0.80, shading level 5 may correspond to an SHGC value of 0.70, shading level 10 may correspond to a SHGC value of 0.60, and shading level 15 may correspond to SHGC For a value of 0.50, a shading level of 20 may correspond to a SHGC value of 0.40, a shading level of 25 may correspond to an SHGC value of 0.30, a shading level of 30 may correspond to a SHGC value of 0.20, and a shading level of 35 (darkest) may correspond to a SHGC value of 0.10. As will be discussed below, light transmitted through a tinted window can impart color in a room. The depth of color will depend on the coloring grade. In some cases, the controller controls one or more tintable windows, such as electrochromic windows. In one instance, at least one or all of the electrochromic devices of the electrochromic window are solid state and inorganic electrochromic devices. In one instance, the electrochromic window is a multipane electrochromic window as set forth in U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 12/851,514 (now U.S. Patent No. 8,705,162), filed August 5, 2010, and entitled "Multipane Electrochromic Windows." state electrochromic window, which application is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. controller 1550or with the controller 1550The communicating master controller can employ control logic to determine control levels based on various data. controller 1550PWM can be indicated 1560A voltage and/or current is applied to or otherwise a control signal is sent to one or more devices based on the determined control level. b. building management system (BMS) The controller described in this article is suitable for integration with a building management system (BMS). BMS is a computer-based control system installed in a building to monitor and control the building's mechanical and electrical equipment, such as heating, ventilation and air conditioning systems (also known as "HVAC systems"), lighting systems, electrical systems (eg, wireless power systems), window systems (such as one or more zones of tintable windows), conveyance systems (such as elevator systems), emergency systems (such as fire protection systems), security systems, and other building systems. A BMS consists of hardware (including interconnects via communication channels to one or more computers) and associated Software composition. For example, a BMS can be implemented using an area network such as Ethernet. The software can be based on, for example, Internet protocols and/or open standards. One example is software from Tridium, Inc., located in Richmond, Virginia. One communication protocol commonly used for BMSs is BACnet (Building Automation and Control Network). BMSs are most common in large buildings and are typically used at least to control environmental conditions within the building. For example, a BMS can control temperature, brightness level, color temperature, contrast ratio, sound level or other sound quality, air quality (such as carbon dioxide level and/or particulate matter level), humidity level, and other conditions within a building. Typically, there are many mechanical devices controlled by the BMS, such as heaters, air conditioners, blowers, vents, and the like. To control the building environment, the BMS can turn on and off or otherwise control these devices in the building system to specific levels. A core function of a typical modern BMS is to maintain a comfortable environment (eg, visual comfort, thermal comfort, acoustic comfort, air quality, etc.) for building occupants while minimizing energy costs/demand. Therefore, modern BMSs are not only used for monitoring and control, but also for optimizing the cooperation between various systems, for example, to save energy and reduce building operating costs. picture 16Draw BMS 1600A schematic diagram of an embodiment, the BMS and the building 1601communicate (wireless or wired) and manage many systems, including security systems 1632, Heating/ventilation/air conditioning (HVAC) system 1634,Lighting system 1636,Power Systems 1642, elevators or other conveyor systems 1644, fire or other emergency systems 1645, window systems associated with tintable windows 1650and the like. security system 1632May include magnetic card access, turnstiles, solenoid actuated door locks, surveillance cameras and other asset or occupant locator devices, burglar alarms, metal detectors and the like. Fire or other emergency systems 1645May include alarm and fire suppression systems including plumbing controls. Lighting system 1636May include interior lighting, exterior lighting, emergency siren lights, emergency exit signs and emergency floor evacuation lighting. Power Systems 1642May include main power sources, backup generators, uninterruptible power supply system (UPS) grids, power generation systems such as photovoltaic power systems, and the like. In other embodiments, the BMS can manage other combinations of building systems. exist picture 16In the illustrated example shown in the BMS 1600main window controller 3202Send control signals to control the window system 1650. In this instance, the main window controller 3202Decentralized network shown as controllers including main network controller 1603, intermediate network controller 1605aand 1605bend-or-leaf controller 1610. end or leaf controller 1610can be similar to picture 15Window Controller 1550, relative to picture 19Window Controller 1940or relative to picture 20Window Controller 790. In one instance, the main network controller 1603Accessible to BMS 1600, and the building 1601Each floor or other area can have an intermediate network controller 1605aand 1605bone of these, and each tintable window or zone of tintable windows has its own terminal controller 1610 .In this instance, the end or leaf controller 1610each of which controls the building 1601Specific tintable windows or specific areas of tintable windows .end or leaf controller 1610Each of these can be in a separate location from the tintable window it controls, or can be integrated into the tintable window. For simplicity, only the buildings 1601The ten tintable windows are shown by the main window controller 3202control. In a typical situation, there may be a large number of tintable windows in a building with the main window controller 3202control. main window controller 3202There is no need for a decentralized network of window controllers. For example, as set forth above, a single end controller controlling the function of a single tintable window or a single zone of a tintable window also falls within the scope of the embodiments disclosed herein. In one aspect, the BMS or another controller receives sensor data from one or more sensors at the building via a communication network. For exterior sensors, a building may include exterior sensors on the roof of the building. Alternatively, the building may include exterior sensors associated with each exterior window or exterior sensors on each side of the building. Exterior sensors on each side of the building can track the irradiance on the sides of the building as the sun changes position throughout the day. As another example, a multi-sensor device with multiple sensors such as light sensors, infrared sensors, ambient temperature sensors, and others may be located at a building, for example, on a rooftop superior. Additionally or alternatively, the BMS may receive feedback data from other building systems. In one instance, the BMS may receive information about the presence and location of occupants in the building. By combining data from various building systems, a BMS can provide, for example, enhanced: 1) environmental control, 2) energy savings, 3) security, 4) flexibility in control options, 5) attribution to other Increased reliability and useful life of other systems due to less dependence of the system and thus less maintenance on other systems, 6) information availability and diagnostics, 7) efficient use of personnel and higher productivity from personnel, and the like various combinations of situations, since the systems can be controlled automatically. Building systems can sometimes operate on a daily, monthly, quarterly or yearly schedule. For example, lighting control systems, window systems, HVAC, and security systems can operate on a 24-hour schedule that takes into account when people are in the building during the workday. At night, the building can enter an energy saving mode, and during the day, the system can operate in a manner that minimizes the building's energy consumption while providing occupant comfort. As another example, the systems may be turned off or put into an energy saving mode during the holidays. Scheduling information can be combined with geographic information. Geographical information may include the latitude and longitude of a building. Geographical information may also include information about the direction each side of a building is facing. Using such information, different rooms on different sides of the building can be controlled in different ways. picture 17For controlling buildings (eg, picture 16buildings shown in 1601) one or more electrochromic devices with tintable windows 1701A system of functions (e.g. switching to different coloring levels) 1700Block diagram of its components. system 1700It can be done by BMS (for example, picture 16BMS shown in 1600) may operate independently of the BMS. system 1700Includes main window controller 1703, the master window controller may send control signals to the one or more tintable windows to control their functions. system 1700Also included with the main window controller 1703electronic communication network 1740. via internet 1740main window controller 1703The control logic, other control logic and instructions and/or sensor and other data for controlling functions of the tintable window are communicated. network 1740It can be wired or wireless network (eg, cloud network). In one embodiment, the network 1740Can communicate with BMS to allow BMS via network 1740Commands for controlling the tintable windows are sent to the tintable windows in the building. system 1700An EC device that also includes the one or more tintable windows (not shown) 1701and optional wall switch 1790, the EC devices and wall switches and main window controllers 1703telecommunication. In the example shown, the main window controller 1703available to EC devices 1701Send control signals to control devices with EC 1701The tinting grade of the tintable window. Each wall switch 1790Also with EC device 1701and main window controller 1703communication. End users (e.g. occupants of rooms with tintable windows) can use wall switches 1790to control devices with EC 1701tinting grades and other features of tintable windows. exist picture 17, the main window controller 1703Decentralized network shown as window controllers including the main network controller 1703, and the main network controller 1703Multiple intermediate network controllers for communication 1705and multiple end or shutter controllers 1710. per multiple end or shutter controller 1710with a single intermediate network controller 1705communication. Although the main window controller 1703is shown as a distributed network of window controllers, but in other embodiments, the main window controller 1703It could also be a single window controller that controls the functions of a single tintable window. picture 17Central System 1700components can be similar in some respects relative to picture 16components described. For example, the main network controller 1703can be similar to the main network controller 1303, and the intermediate network controller 1705can be similar to the intermediate network controller 1705. picture 17Each window controller in the distributed network can include a processor (eg, a microprocessor) and a computer-readable medium in electrical communication with the processor. exist picture 17In, each leaf or end window controller 1710EC unit with single tintable window 1701Communication to control the tinting level of other tintable windows in a building. In the case of an IGU, the leaf or end window controller 1710Compatible with EC devices on multiple windows of the IGU 1701Communicate to control the coloration level of the IGU. In other embodiments, each leaf or end window controller 1710Can communicate with, for example, a plurality of tintable windows in a region of windows. leaf or end window controller 1710Can be integrated into a tintable window or can be separate from the tintable window it controls. picture 17Nakanoha and end window controllers 1710can be similar to picture 16Nakanohana or Leaf Controller 1610. Each wall switch 1790Operable by the end user (e.g., occupant of a room) to control a wall switch 1790Tinting levels and other features of tintable windows for communications. End user operable wall switch 1790to the EC device in the associated tintable window 1701Send control signals. In some cases, from the wall switch 1790These signals can be overridden from the main window controller 1703signal. In other cases (for example, high demand situations), from the main window controller 1703The control signal can be overridden from the wall switch 1790the control signal. Each wall switch 1790Also works with leaf or end window controllers 1710communication to switch from wall to switch 1790Information about sent control signals (e.g., time, date, requested shader level, etc.) is sent back to the main window controller 1703. In some cases, the wall switch can be manually operated 1790. In other cases, wireless communication (e.g., using infrared (IR) and/or radio frequency (RF) signals) with control signals may be sent by an end user using a remote device (e.g., mobile phone, tablet, etc.) to wirelessly control wall switch 1790. In some cases, wall switches 1790Wireless protocol chips such as Bluetooth, EnOcean, WiFi, Zigbee and the like may be included. Although picture 17wall switch 1790located on the wall, but the system 1700Other embodiments may have switches located elsewhere in the room. system 1700Also includes multi-sensor devices 1712, the multi-sensor device via a communication network 1740Electronically communicate with one or more controllers for communicating sensor readings and/or filtered sensor values to the controller(s). picture 18Depicting the building network used for the building 1800The block diagram of the embodiment. As noted above, building networks 1800Any number of different communication protocols may be employed, including BACnet. As shown, the building network 1800Includes main network controller 1805, lighting control panel 1810BMS 1815, Safety control system 1820and user console 1825. These different controllers and systems in the building can be used to receive the HVAC system from the building 1830,lamp 1835, security sensor 1840, door lock 1845,camera 1850and tintable windows 1855input and/or control of the HVAC system 1830,lamp 1835, security sensor 1840, door lock 1845,camera 1850and tintable windows 1855. main network controller 1805can communicate with the main network controller as described with respect to Figure 17 3403Works in a similar fashion. lighting control panel 1810May include circuits for controlling interior lighting, exterior lighting, emergency siren lights, emergency exit signs, and emergency floor evacuation lighting. lighting control panel 1810Occupancy sensors in rooms of buildings may also be included. BMS 1815may include a computer server that runs from a network 1800Other systems and controllers receive data and send data to the network 1800other systems and controllers to issue commands. For example, BMS 1815Autonomous Network Controller 1805, lighting control panel 1810and safety control system 1820Each of them receives data and sends data to the main network controller 1805, lighting control panel 1810and safety control system 1820Each of them issues commands. safety control system 1820May include magnetic card access, turnstiles, solenoid actuated door locks, security cameras, burglar alarms, metal detectors and the like. user console 1825It may be a computer terminal that can be used by the building manager to schedule control, monitoring, optimization and troubleshooting operations on the different systems of the building. Software from Tridium, Inc. can be generated from the 1225Visual representation of data from different systems. Each of these different controls may control a different type of device/equipment. main network controller 1805control window 1855. lighting control panel 1810control lights 1835. BMS 1815Controllable HVAC 1830. safety control system 1820control safety sensor 1840, door lock 1845and camera 1850. building network 1800Exchange and/or share data between all the different devices/equipment and controllers of the part. c. An instance of a window controller for independently controlling multiple shaded areas In certain aspects, a single window controller or multiple window controllers can be used to independently control multiple zones of a single electrochromic device of a multi-zone tintable window or multiple tintable windows in a zone. In a first design, a single window controller is in electrical communication with multiple voltage regulators. In a second design, a master window controller is in electrical communication with multiple sub-controllers. In some cases, each multi-zone tintable window includes a memory, chip, or card that stores information about the window, including physical characteristics, production information (date, location, fabrication parameters, batch number, etc.) and the like. The memory, chip or card may or may not be part of the onboard window controller, eg, in a wire harness, pigtail and/or connector to the window controller. Described herein is a window controller that controls a multi-zone tintable window, whether on or as part of the window. U.S. Patent Application 13/049,756, filed March 16, 2011, entitled "MULTIPURPOSE CONTROLLER FOR MULTISTATE WINDOWS" and U.S. Patent Application, filed November 24, 2015, entitled "SELF-CONTAINED EC IGU" Additional information that may be included in memory is set forth in 14/951,410, both applications incorporated herein by reference for all purposes. - controller design 1 As mentioned above, according to a first design, a window controller is connected to the voltage regulators it controls. Each voltage regulator is in electrical communication with one of the colored zones. In one embodiment, the voltage regulators are onboard, ie part of the window assembly, eg in the secondary seal of the insulating glass unit. These voltage regulators may be physically separate from the controller, or be part of the controller, whether the controller is onboard or separate from the window. A window controller is in electrical communication with each voltage regulator to be able to independently instruct each voltage regulator to deliver voltage to its own tinting zone. Each voltage regulator delivers current to only one of the two bus bars in a particular colored region. This design involves multiple voltage regulators, one for each shaded zone, and all voltage regulators are collectively controlled by a single window controller via a communication bus (not shown). picture 19For this first design there are five (5) voltage regulators connected to the 1945window controller 1940A schematic diagram of the control system. Each voltage regulator 1945electrically connected to the window 1950the corresponding coloring area 1952one of the bus bars and is electrically connected to the window controller 1940. In this instance, the window controller 1940Indicates each voltage regulator 1945independently to its own colored area 1952delivery voltage. Each voltage regulator 1945color it 1952Only one of the two bus bars above delivers current. In this way, each district 1952Can be compared to other areas 1952Color independently. Another structural feature of this first design is that each of the voltage regulators is directed to or connected to only one of the bus bars in a respective zone of the multi-zone electrochromic device. The bus bars in the zones opposite the voltage regulated bus bars all receive the same voltage from the window controller. This presents a challenge if one of the colored regions needs to be driven in the opposite direction than the other regions because if the voltage applied to the other region does not coincide with such reversed polarity, then the polarity on the two bus bars will not work. reverse. In this design, each voltage regulator is a simple design with logic for applying voltage as directed by the window controller (eg, instructions stored on memory and retrieved for execution by the processor) . The local window controllers include logic with instructions for enforcing the rules, including: 1) communicating with higher level window controllers, 2) reducing power if necessary, 3) and The actual voltage applied to each. As one example of communicating with a higher-level window controller, a local window controller may receive instructions to place each of the individual regions in a respective tinting state. The window controller can then interpret this information and decide how best to achieve this result by applying the appropriate drive voltage, hold time, ramp profile, hold voltage, etc. to drive the transition. In U.S. Patent Application 13/449,248, filed April 17, 2012, and titled "CONTROLLER FOR OPTICALLY-SWITCHABLE WINDOWS" Details of control instructions for driving transitions in optically switchable windows are set forth in patent application 13/449,251, both of which are hereby incorporated by reference in their entirety. - controller design 2 In a second design, separate sub-controllers are used to control each of the shaded regions. In this design, the sub-controllers receive overall shading instructions from the main window controller. For example, the master (superior) window controller can send a signal with shading instructions to the sub-controllers to drive a particular shading region to transition to a new shading state. The sub-controller includes a memory that includes control instructions for driving transitions, including instructions for determining appropriate driving voltages, hold times, ramp curves, etc. required for driving transitions. The master window controller for a multi-zone window communicates with higher level control entities on the control network, the master window controller is also used to reduce the power from the power supply to an appropriate level for the sub-controllers to perform their functions. In such a design, each sub-controller has a lead to each bus bar of the respective colored zone it is responsible for. In this way, the polarity on one pair of bus bars for each zone can be independently controlled. If one of the colored zones needs to be driven at the opposite polarity than the other zone, by this design the polarity on the two bus bars can be reversed. This is an advantage over the first design because each zone can be colored or cleared independently. picture 20For connection to five sub-controllers (SWC) according to this second design 2070Schematic diagram of a single window controller. per sub-controller 2070has leads to the corresponding shaded area 2062The two leads of the bus bar. In this example, the SWC 2070 is connected to the main window controller 2080A SWC at the end of a chain of SWCs 2070 2070electrically connected in series. In this instance, the window controller 2080sub-controller 2070Sends a signal with a shader command to drive its associated shader 2062change. d. Photovoltaic power In certain embodiments, a tintable window (eg, an electrochromic window) includes a photovoltaic (PV) film or other light harvesting device. The light harvesting device harvests energy and converts solar energy to power window controllers and/or other window devices or for storage in batteries. e. Airborne window controller In some aspects, a tintable window has a window controller on the window. Details of an example of an airborne window controller are set forth in U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 14/951,410, filed November 24, 2015, entitled "SELF-CONTAINTED EC IGU," which application is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. enter. F. wireless power supply According to one aspect, the multi-zone window may be powered wirelessly, eg, via radio frequency, magnetic induction, laser, microwave energy, or the like. Details regarding components of wireless powered windows can be found in International PCT Application PCT/US17/52798, filed September 21, 2017, entitled "WIRELESS POWERED ELECTROCHROMIC WINDOWS," which application is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety . In one aspect, a multi-zone tintable window includes a radio frequency (RF) antenna that converts RF energy into an electrical potential for powering transitions of one or more tinting zones in the multi-zone tintable window. The RF antenna can be located in the frame of the multi-zone window or in another structure such as a spacer between insulating glass units. For example, an RF antenna may be located in a spacer between insulating glass units having multiple windows, at least one of which includes a multi-zone electrochromic device. The RF antenna receives RF signals from the RF transmitter. In one case, an RF transmitter provides RF signals to multiple RF antennas. Details regarding examples of antennas are set forth in PCT application PCT/US15/62387, entitled "WINDOW ANTENNAS," filed November 24, 2015, which application is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. IV. Used to control tintable windows and / or other building system functions control logic In some implementations, the control logic used to determine shading decisions for groups (regions) of windows may be similar to the control logic used to determine shading decisions for multiple shading regions within a window or for individual windows within a group of windows to operate. That is, the control logic for multiple windows determines the tinting state of each window based on the position and orientation of that window. The control logic for multiple regions of a window will determine the shaded state of each region of the window based on the location and orientation of that region. An example of control logic for determining tinting decisions for multiple windows and transitioning the windows to the determined tinting state can be found in the PCT application titled "CONTROL METHOD FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS" filed on May 5, 2015 PCT/US15/29675, which application is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. In certain aspects, as set forth herein, certain operations of this control logic may be adapted to determine shading decisions for multiple shading regions and to power transitions in accordance with those shading decisions. In some aspects, the control logic may be adapted to address visual transitions of coloring within a particular colored region and/or between adjacent colored regions. For example, the control logic may include logic to determine certain shading states that produce strong contrast between different shading states in different regions or diffuse blending of colors between regions (e.g., using Resistive Area Technology). As discussed above, resistive regions between adjacent colored regions (rather than physical bifurcations) can be used to create coloring gradients between adjacent regions. This gradient of coloring generally exists across the width of the resistive area, and thus the smoother the visual transition, the greater the width of the resistive area. The control logic may be adapted to account for coloring gradients in the resistive region and/or may be adapted to apply gradient voltages along the length of the bus bars of the colored region to create a coloring gradient within the colored region (or monolithic EC device film). In one example, the bus bar can be tapered to apply a gradient voltage along the length and create a color gradient along the length. In another aspect, the control logic may be adapted to control a window having multiple tinted zones to determine a tinting state that will blend colors across the multiple zones. In one aspect, the control logic may be adapted to control the tinting state of a series of adjacent regions so that the transition from a region that needs to be particularly dark to a region that needs to be particularly clear is not abrupt. Another modification of the control logic may involve the ability to apply considerations associated with additional features of multi-zone windows in addition to common considerations such as glare control, views, natural lighting, occupant thermal comfort, building energy management, etc. Individual routines (eg, modules other than modules A-D of PCT application PCT/US15/29675, which sets forth aspects of Intelligence® as set forth above). For example, if light harvesting is the motive, additional modules may have to be built into the control logic to account for this additional consideration. In some cases, the order in which the functionality for addressing this additional feature or functionality of the shader is placed in the processing pipeline for common considerations may not matter. For example, the Intelligence® module does not necessarily need to operate in the following order in a situation: A à B à C à D. It will be appreciated that it may be the case that, in other cases, the order in which the modules are executed is not important. The control logic can also be adjusted to account for highly localized glare control across multiple zones. This situation can be addressed, for example, by modifications to module A of the control logic described in more detail in PCT application PCT/US15/29675. Different designs of window controllers that can power tinting transitions of multiple tinting zones of one or more multi-zone tintable windows are set forth above. In some aspects, a shaded region may have two shaded states: a first merged shaded state and a second darkened shaded state. In other aspects, a colored region can have four colored states. In other aspects, a colored area may have more than four colored states. a. for multiple shaded areas / Example of window tinting control logic picture twenty oneIncluded to illustrate the method according to the embodiment 2100is a flowchart showing operations for making shading decisions for multiple shading regions/windows. Such control logic may be used to determine tinting decisions for multiple windows and/or multiple shaded regions in one or more tintable windows, or combinations thereof. Instructions for this control logic are stored in memory and can be accessed by, for example, a window controller (such as is specifically referred to herein with respect to picture 19and picture 20window controller shown and described) to fetch and execute. The control logic includes two instructions for making the shading decisions shown in the flowchart to determine shading levels for a plurality of shading regions/windows. The control logic also includes instructions for independently controlling the tinting regions/windows to transition to the determined tinting levels. In certain aspects, operations of this control logic may be adapted to determine shading decisions to implement the shading configurations set forth herein. in operation 2110, calculated at the latitude and longitude coordinates of the window and at a specific time t i The date of the hour and the position of the sun at the time of day. The latitude and longitude coordinates may be input from a configuration file. The date and time of day may be based on the current time provided by the timer. in operation 2120, computed in the operation 2110The amount of direct sunlight transmitted into the room through each of these zones/windows at a particular moment of use in based on operating 2110The amount of sunlight (eg penetration depth) is calculated from the position of the sun calculated in and the configuration of each zone/window. The zone/window configuration includes information such as the location of the window, the size of the window, the orientation (ie, facing direction) of the window, and details of any external occlusions. The zone/window configuration information is input from a configuration file associated with the zone/window. in operation 2130, to determine the irradiance level in the room. In some cases, an irradiance level is calculated based on clear sky conditions to determine clear sky irradiance. The clear sky irradiance level is determined based on the window orientation from the configuration file and based on the latitude and longitude of the building. These calculations can also be based on operating 2110The time and date of the day at the specific moment used in . Publicly available software such as the RADIANCE program, which is an open source program, may provide calculations for determining clear sky irradiance. Additionally, the irradiance level may be based on one or more sensor readings. For example, a light sensor in a room may take periodic readings to determine the actual irradiance in the room. in operation 2140, the control logic determines whether the room is occupied. The control logic may base its decisions on one or more types of information including, for example, scheduling information, occupancy sensor data, asset tracking information, picture twenty threeshown in ) from the user's activation data, etc. For example, control logic may determine that a room is occupied if the scheduling information indicates that an occupant is likely to be in the room, such as during typical business hours. As another example, if the schedule information indicates a holiday/weekend, the control logic may determine that the room is not occupied. As another example, control logic may determine that a room is occupied based on readings from occupancy sensors. In another example, the control logic may determine that a room is occupied if an occupant has entered information indicating occupancy at the manual control panel of the wall unit or remote control. In another example, the control logic may determine that a room is occupied (occupied) based on information received from an asset tracking device, such as an RFID tag. In this example, the occupants themselves are not tracked. By including occupancy sensors in the room with devices on the occupant's property or with systems such as Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE) that work with occupancy sensors, the control logic can determine whether the room is occupied. If in operation 2140If the room is determined to be unoccupied, the control logic selects for each zone/window a shading level that prioritizes energy control for heating/cooling the building (operating 2150). In some cases, other factors, such as safety or other safety concerns, may be considered when selecting a tint grade. use in operation 2140The coloring level of the middle judgment changes the area/window. Control logic then returns to the operating 2110, 2120and 2130, which is usually done periodically. If in operation 2140If it is determined that the room is occupied, then the control logic determines whether the user has selected the mode (operation 2160) or whether to select a mode for a particular occupant based on an occupancy profile. For example, a user (e.g., occupant or building operator) can click on a remote control or wall unit (such as picture twenty threeSelect the mode at the user interface shown in ). In some cases, the GUI may have buttons (eg, icons) designed to select a mode, eg, a lighting icon. Some examples of modes include: "Daylight Mode", "Uniform Mode", "Health Mode", "Emergency Mode" which are user defined modes. For example, a user can define "User 1 - Mode 1" with a specific shader configuration. If in operation 2160If it is determined that the user has selected a mode, the control logic selects a tinting level for each region/window based on the mode (operation 2170). For example, if Daylighting Mode is turned on, the shading level may be determined based on the following factors in the following order of priority: avoiding glare and allowing natural light to enter the room through the daylighting area. use in operation 2160The shading level selected in causes the area/window to change. Control logic then returns to the operating 2110, 2120and 2130, which is usually done periodically. In some cases, the three-dimensional projection of sunlight through each zone/window is calculated as the amount of direct sunlight transmitted into the room and a determination is made as to whether glare conditions exist in the room with that zone/window. hereinafter relative to picture 24A, picture 24Band picture 24CLet's discuss the discussion of light projection and the determination of glare conditions based on light projection. If in operation 2160If it is determined that the user has not selected a mode, the control logic selects a tinting level for each zone/window based on factors in the following order of priority: 1) glare control, 2) energy control, and 3) daylighting (operating 2180). In some cases, other secondary factors may also be considered in the selection of shading grades, including one or more of the following: time delay to prevent rapid transitions, color rendering, gradation of shading, based on historical data Feedback, occupants' viewing of the external environment and light collection. For example, when an occupant is in their usual location in a room, the occupant may wish to look out of a window, for example, to check weather conditions. If the occupant's view of the exterior environment is taken into account when making tinting decisions, the control logic may determine that while a dimmed tint state for a particular tinted area/window will avoid glare, a lower tint level will be used to provide greater visibility to the exterior environment. to see more clearly. In one embodiment, the three-dimensional projection of sunlight through each zone/window is calculated to determine the amount of direct sunlight transmitted into the room and to determine whether glare conditions exist in the room with that zone/window. hereinafter relative to picture 24A, picture 24Band picture 24CLet's discuss the discussion of light projection and the determination of glare conditions based on light projection. in operation 2180, in order to determine the suitability for operation 2120The tinting level for the amount of glare determined in the control logic can use an occupancy lookup table to 2120The amount of glare calculated in and the acceptance angle of the area/window are used to select the appropriate tinting level for the area/window. Space type and occupancy lookup tables are provided as input from a window-specific configuration file. Instances of the occupancy lookup table have different shading levels for different combinations of glare amounts and space types. For example, an occupancy lookup table may have eight (8) tinting levels including 0 (brightest), 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, and 35 (brightest). The brightest shading level 0 corresponds to a SHGC value of 0.80, shading level 5 corresponds to a SHGC value of 0.70, shading level 10 corresponds to a SHGC value of 0.60, shading level 15 corresponds to a SHGC value of 0.50, shading level 20 corresponds to a SHGC value of 0.40, and shading level 25 A shading level of 30 corresponds to an SHGC value of 0.20, and a shading level of 35 (darkest) corresponds to an SHGC value of 0.10, corresponding to a SHGC value of 0.30. In this example, the occupancy lookup table has three space types: Desk 1, Desk 2, and Foyer, and six glare amounts (eg, the penetration depth of sunlight into the room through the zone/window). The tinting grade for table 1 closer to the window is higher than the tinting grade for table 2 farther from the window to prevent glare when the table is closer to the window. An illustrated example of such an occupancy lookup table can be found in PCT/US15/29675, filed May 5, 2015, and entitled "CONTROL METHOD FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS." In one embodiment, the control logic may be based on operating 2130The irradiance level determined in the middle is reduced based on the operating 2120The coloring level of the glare judgment in the medium judgment. For example, the control logic may receive sensor readings of irradiance indicating the presence of cloudy conditions. In such a case, the control logic may reduce the tinting level of the zone/window determined to be associated with a glare condition. in operation 2180, the control logic then determines whether to change the selected tinting level appropriate to the amount of glare based on the second priority, ie, energy control in the building. For example, if the outside temperature is extremely high such that the cooling load is high, the control logic may increase the tinting level in one or more zones/windows to reduce the cooling load. As another example, if the outside temperature is extremely cold, the control logic may reduce the tint level in one or more zones/windows while maintaining a dimmed tint state in zones/windows that would otherwise cause glare on the occupied area. The control logic then determines whether to change the tinting level based on the third priority, daylighting, while taking into account energy control in the building and maintaining darkened tinting in areas/windows that would otherwise cause glare on occupied areas state. use in operation 2180The coloring level of the middle judgment changes the area/window. Control logic then returns to the operating 2110, 2120and 2130, which is usually done periodically. b. Factors used to improve occupant health According to some aspects, the control logic is designed to control the tinting of tintable windows and other building system functions by maintaining visual comfort, thermal comfort, acoustic comfort, air quality and Other comfort factors to improve occupant health. For example, the control logic in question can be controlled by avoiding glare at the occupant's location or possible location, maintaining a brightness level and color temperature associated with the occupant's visual comfort, by adjusting natural lighting, and/or by adjusting window The tinting and associated light color in the room to minimize the contrast ratio in the room to maintain visual comfort. Other techniques for avoiding glare are discussed below. Additionally or alternatively, the control logic may control the rate of transitions between shading states. Additionally, certain shading configurations may control shading gradients between adjacent shading regions in different shading states and/or within a particular shading. Some configurations for controlling coloring gradients between adjacent regions and within specific regions are discussed above. Some configurations aimed at avoiding glare at the occupant's position or possible position, increasing natural lighting in the room and/or the color of the window and associated light color in the room are also discussed above. 1. Glare avoidance using passive or active manipulation of light In certain embodiments, a multi-zone window includes one or more technologies for passive or active manipulation of light passing through the window to ensure no glare on occupied areas and control thermal loads while allowing continuous daylighting into the room. These techniques can work together with controlling the tinting of the multi-zone window. In one aspect, the window can have active or passive control of the direction of light entering the room. Some examples of such technologies include microshrouds, hexagonal lattices, light pipes, IR mirrors or IR reflectors, IR absorbing or IR reflecting films. In one example, the window is designed to ensure that light is directed in parallel as it enters the room by using microshrouds or hexagonal lattices or thin film coatings. These techniques can be used to allow natural light into buildings while avoiding glare, control heat and allow manipulation of light, providing favorable color rendering using natural daylight. In one example, a multi-zone window in the form of an IGU has a light pipe in the area between two windows. The light pipes are in the area near the tinted areas of the windows. The two colored areas are in a clear state for continuous lighting to transmit the sunlight incident on the outer surface. In another aspect, a multi-zone window in the form of an IGU includes one or more IR mirrors or IR reflectors in the region between two windows of the IGU. In one example, the mirrors/reflectors are located in an area aligned with one or more tinted areas that can remain in a clear state to allow continuous lighting into the room when sunlight is incident on the exterior surface at that area . In another aspect, a multi-zone window with an electrochromic device includes an IR absorbing or IR reflecting film to control heat entering a building and has active or passive control of the direction of light entering a room. - miniature shield In embodiments with microshrouds, the microshrouds or the window can be hinged to adjust the direction of light entering the room. For example, the microshrouds can be hinged to orient them to direct light bouncing off the ceiling and/or remain parallel. In one example, the multi-zone window is circular and is rotatable (at least) in the plane of the wall it is installed in to collect light as the sun position and azimuth change, e.g. Direct light in the same direction. The circular window may additionally have controllably hinged micro-shutters to change its orientation to ensure proper glare-free lighting throughout the day. Some details of microshrouds and MEMS devices are set forth in U.S. Patent Application Serial No. 14/443,353, entitled "MULTI-PANE WINDOWS INCLUDING ELECTROCHROMIC DEVICES AND ELECTROMECHANICAL SYSTEMS DEVICES," filed May 15, 2015, which It is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. A multi-zone window with a micro-shading will typically be installed above a tintable window/zone without a micro-shading, and above the level of the occupant, to help ensure there is never any glare on the occupant. If the window has active or passive aiming of the incident light, the angle of the microshroud can be adjusted to modify the angle to ensure no glare even if it is placed below the height of the occupant. In some cases, multi-zone windows with technology for passive or active manipulation of light can be controlled based on input from cameras or sensors in the room, such as occupancy sensors. When coupled with cameras or sensors in the room, this configuration can use active targeting to optimally heat the room when desired. Additionally, coupled with internal active or passive reflective surfaces, the system can collect light and direct it to other areas of the building. For example, light pipes can be used to convey light to other areas or simply be directed by opening holes in the walls to allow light to penetrate deeper into the building. 2. Color rendering and modified color temperature The tinting of a tintable window can change the amount of light transmitted through the tintable window and the wavelength spectrum and associated color of the interior light transmitted into the room. Some of the coloring configurations described herein have the technology to provide a preferred spectral selection of incident light. These technologies can enhance lighting to balance the color displayed indoors with the amount of natural light in the appropriate wavelengths to improve visual comfort, circadian rhythm adjustment, and associated physiological responses. For example, a tintable window may include a filter layer that controls the transmission of natural sunlight through the window. These technologies can improve the color and spectrum of incident sunlight entering a room and the comfort, visual perception, mood and health of occupants. Some techniques can change the CCT (correlated color temperature) and CRI (color rendering index) of the light in the room so that the color of the incident light is closer to natural light. A shading configuration provides natural lighting and filtered light. These configurations can also use artificial lighting to enhance and/or adjust CCT and/or CRI. Other approaches provide only filtered light and artificial lighting to enhance and/or adjust CCT and/or CRI. - Use color balance to achieve optimal lighting for occupants As outlined above, the methods described require tinting in certain areas and not in others, e.g., certain areas of a multi-zone tintable window or certain windows in a group of tintable windows, for occupant Reduction of glare while allowing ambient light to enter, i.e., so-called "daylighting", daylighting uses natural light to meet lighting requirements and color shifts (color balance), e.g. unwanted from tintable windows of the space given to the occupants blue. In general, occupants prefer natural sunlight to artificial lighting from, for example, incandescent, light emitting diode (LED) or fluorescent lighting. However, with advancements in LED lighting technology, a greater range of lighting possibilities, wavelengths, frequencies, colors, intensity or lumen ranges, and the like are possible. Certain embodiments use LED lighting technology to offset blue or other unwanted colors in an occupant's space due to transmitted light from a tintable window. In certain embodiments, control of the tintable windows includes control of LED lighting to correct this perceived and manifested color to produce ambient lighting conditions that occupants prefer. These approaches can improve the color and spectrum of incident sunlight entering a room and occupants' comfort, visual perception, mood and well-being. Some methods change the CCT (correlated color temperature) and CRI (color rendering index) of the light in the room so that the color of the incident light is closer to natural light. In some embodiments, LED lighting is used to enhance daylighting from natural light sources, e.g., where the amount, angle, or other factors of natural light entering a room are such that the natural lighting is not sufficiently offset from filtered light passing through a tintable window when the color. For example, electrochromic windows can change the spectral bandwidth, color and amount of natural light entering a room. By providing better spectral selection of the incident light, we can provide enhanced lighting to balance the color of the interior appearance with the required amount of natural light in the appropriate frequency to ensure visual comfort and, for example, circadian rhythm adjustment and improved physiology reaction. In certain embodiments, LED lighting is used as a substitute for natural light in order to achieve daylighting; that is, when only filtered light through the tinted window is available, the LED lighting is adjusted to compensate for the unwanted light imparted by the tintable window. To the color. It may be the case, for example, that certain occupants require window elevations that are uniform in tinting, i.e. multi-zone windows, or that tinting some windows while not tinting others is undesirable from an aesthetic point of view of. In one embodiment, the color and light characteristics of filtered light from a window or group of windows that are uniformly tinted (that is, certain windows or areas are not used to allow daylight in to shift the color) are quantified. Measurements or calculations based on known filtering properties of the tintable window. Based on the obtained values, LED lighting is used to offset unwanted colors or other light characteristics in order to improve occupant comfort. Some methods change the CCT (correlated color temperature) and CRI (color rendering index) of the light in the room to make the ambient light color closer to the color of natural light. In these embodiments, incident light (with or without natural light) is modeled via predictive algorithms or by room sensors (e.g., on walls, e.g. picture twenty threeIncident light (with or without natural light) is measured directly in the described wall unit, or in one or more of the tintable windows that allow light to enter the space. In one example, LED lighting is used to maintain a higher color temperature when the tintable window is in a less tinted (less absorbing) state, and LED lighting is used when the tintable window is in a more tinted (more absorbing) state. lighting to impart a lower color temperature (eg, more yellowish) to maintain a CRI closer to that of natural lighting in the space. Additional aspects of these embodiments are set forth below in the "Circadian Rhythm Adjustment" and "Healthy Patterns" subsections of this specification. - Circadian Rhythm Adjustment In certain tinting configurations, the tinting is controlled (eg, by filters) to change the wavelength spectrum of incident light to the appropriate light wavelengths to adjust circadian rhythms and thus benefit occupants. In one technique, coloring is controlled (eg, by filters) to change the wavelength spectrum of incident light to an occupant's preferred appearing color. Such technology allows control of LED lighting or other lighting to correct this perceived and manifested color to better lighting conditions for occupants. By controlling the transmission of some amount of natural lighting at the appropriate wavelength/wavelengths, circadian rhythms can be adjusted, which can benefit the health and wellness of the occupants. In such configurations, the control logic may have operations to predict the amount and direction of solar radiation, or sensors in the room may measure the amount and direction of solar radiation. For example, an irradiance sensor located on a wall or window in a room may send a signal with periodic measurements to the window controller. In one instance, the sensor may have to be proven sufficiently sensitive (eg, in a healthcare setting)/tested and calibrated to ensure correct results. Alternatively, we can obtain this information from the lighting system. To provide circadian smart lighting, windows can have specific sensors with bandgap filters and time trackers to ensure that the window provides the correct spectrum of natural light required at specific times of the day. This can be provided by daylight passing through the windows and/or by enhanced interior lighting that has been requested to provide the correct amount of illumination of the appropriate wavelength. - " healthy model " Furthermore, the color of interior light may have an impact on the behavior of occupants in different spaces based on the function of the space. The control logic may have a separate logic module for controlling filtered natural light or enhanced interior lighting to benefit the mood and behavior of the occupants. The operation of this module may function differently depending on the function of the space in which the occupant is located in the room. In some cases, the user may be able to select "Health Mode" on the user control panel to control the lights in the room according to this mod designed to improve the mood and behavior of the occupants. In some cases, the control logic may be adapted to predict the wavelength and intensity of the external lighting and then combine this with the current shading level spectral characteristics and predict the spectral distribution of incident sunlight entering the room. The wavelength and intensity of exterior lighting can be predicted, for example, using a weather service and based on the sun angle calculated by a solar calculator. By including occupancy sensors in rooms via devices on the occupants or systems such as BLE that work with occupancy sensors, control logic can choose whether to control daylighting and windows relative to the occupancy profile. Alternatively, if the room has a camera capable of recording the brightness and spectrum in the room, the camera image can be used to determine if there is an occupant, where the occupant is, and what offset or offset to the interior light would be needed to correct for the EC filtered light. Change. This camera can also be calibrated to ensure that for the time of day and specific location the occupant gets the right amount of light spectrum to benefit their circadian rhythm. Alternatively, by using a large number of sensors in the ceiling or in each light, the sensor data can be used to verify occupants, occupancy of a particular location and color rendering of desired lighting and benefit to the occupant's circadian rhythm Just the right amount of spectrum. Coloring decisions based on health considerations are based on one or more factors, including: (1) lighting in the room with an appropriate wavelength spectrum to adjust the occupant's circadian rhythm; (3) provide an appropriate color rendering index for the interior light in the room based on a predetermined color appearance to correct the filtered light color of the EC IGU; (4) correlated color temperature for the interior light in the room based on Predetermining the amount of CCT to correct the filtered light color of the EC IGU that can be applied to improve the psychological effect of light in a given interior space; (5) Consider unique sensors that are proven to support lighting Appropriate spectral distribution to benefit occupants' circadian rhythms; and (6) lighting targets that change based on whether occupants are affected by lighting controlled by interior lighting or filtered light from an EC IGU . c. Example of control logic for controlling tinting of tintable windows In certain implementations, the control logic includes operations to determine and control tinting in a tintable window (eg, an electrochromic window) to account for occupant comfort and/or energy saving considerations. In some cases, the control logic includes multiple logic modules. The shading level determined by one logic module and/or other calculations are input to another logic module to calculate the final shading level determined by all modules. If an override is applied, the override value can be used as the final shading level. Once the control logic determines the final shading level, the control logic sends a control signal with shading instructions to transition the tintable window to the final shading level. An example of control logic with a logic module configured to determine the tinting level of tintable windows can be found in International PCT Application PCT/US15/, filed May 5, 2015 and entitled "CONTROL METHOD FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS" 29675, which application is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. Another example of control logic with a logic module configured to determine the tinting level of tintable windows can be found in the International PCT Application PCT/ In US 16/41344, this application is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. In some embodiments, the control logic uses one or more of three logic modules (also referred to herein as "Module A," "Module B," and "Module C") to determine the The tinting grade for tintable windows between the interior and exterior. Each control logic module may determine the shading level based on a future time. For example, the future time used in the computation may be a future time sufficient to allow the transition to complete after the shading instruction is received. In this example, the controller may send shading instructions at the current time, before the actual transition. Before the transition is complete, the window will transition to the desired tinting level at that time. Module A can be used to determine the level of tinting for occupant comfort based on direct sunlight passing through tintable windows onto occupied areas or areas of occupant activity. The shade level is determined based on the calculated penetration depth of direct sunlight entering the room at a particular moment and the type of space in the room (eg, table near window, hallway, etc.). In one example, the penetration depth at a future time is calculated to account for the time it takes for the window to transition to a new tinted state. Publicly available programs can be used to calculate the position of the sun based on the time of day, time of year, and latitude and longitude of buildings. The first module can be based on the geometry of the window (e.g., window size), its location and orientation in the room, any fins or other external shading outside the window, and the calculated position of the sun (e.g., for a particular time of day). The time and date of the direct sunlight angle) to calculate the penetration depth. Each space type is associated with different shade levels for occupant comfort. For example, if the activity is critical, such as doing office work at a desk or computer, and the desk is near a window, the desired shading level may be higher than when the desk is away from the window. As another example, if the activity is non-critical, such as activity in a hallway, the desired tinting level may be lower than that of the same space with a table. Input the coloring grade calculated by module A into module B. The control logic of module B can be used to determine the tinting level based on the irradiance transmitted through the window under clear sky conditions (also referred to as "clear sky irradiance"). Radiation can come from sunlight scattered by molecules and particles in the atmosphere. Clear sky irradiance can be calculated based on the latitude and longitude of the building, the day of the year and time of day, and the orientation of the windows using a program such as the open source program RADIANCE program. In one example, module B may be used to determine a tint grade that is darker than the tint grade input from module A and transmit less heat than calculated to be transmitted for a reference glass at maximum clear sky irradiance. The maximum clear-sky irradiance is the highest level of irradiance calculated for clear-sky conditions at all times. In one example, module C then uses the solar heat gain coefficient (base SHGC) of the reference glass and the calculated maximum clear sky irradiance to determine the tinting level. Module B gradually increases the shading level calculated in module A and takes the shading level such that the internal irradiance is less than or equal to the reference internal irradiance (base SHGC×maximum clear-sky irradiance). Input the coloring grade calculated in module B and the calculated clear sky irradiance into module C. The control logic in module C can be used to determine the tinting level based on the immediate external irradiance based on direct or reflected light illuminating the tintable window. This immediate external irradiance takes into account light that may be blocked by or reflected from objects such as buildings or weather conditions (eg, clouds) that were not accounted for in the clear sky calculations performed in module B. The real-time external irradiance may be calculated based on one or more of the following: measurements obtained by external sensors, weather forecast data received via a communication network, determined cloud conditions at buildings, and the like. In general, the control logic for module B will determine shader levels that darken (or not change) the shader levels determined by module A, and the control logic for module C will determine shader levels that darken (or not change) the shader levels determined by module A The shading level at which the shading level is brightened (or not changed). The control logic in module C can determine the internal irradiance in the room based on the external irradiance and the current tinting level of the tintable window. For example, Module C can use the following equation to determine the calculated interior irradiance based on the clear sky irradiance calculation: Calculated interior irradiance = Shading grade SHGC x Calculated clear sky irradiance. Module C can calculate instant internal irradiance based on external sensor readings or other external data using the following equation: Instant internal irradiance = Shading grade SHGC x irradiance reading. In one embodiment, module C uses the above equation to calculate the interior irradiance of a room when the tintable window has the tinting level determined in module B and then determines based on the tinting level from B that the interior irradiance is less than Or a tinting grade equal to the condition of the calculated internal irradiance. Module B and/or Module C can determine a tinting level that takes energy savings into account in addition to occupant comfort. These modules can determine the energy savings associated with a particular tinting level by comparing the performance of a tintable window at the determined tinting level to a baseline glass or other standard reference window. The purpose of using this reference window may be to ensure that the control logic complies with municipal building code requirements or other requirements for reference windows used in the building's location. Typically, municipalities use conventional low emissivity glass to define reference windows to control the amount of air conditioning load in buildings. As an example of how a reference window can be incorporated into the control logic, the logic can be designed such that the irradiance passing through a given tintable window is never greater than the maximum irradiance passing through the reference window as specified by the respective municipality. In disclosed embodiments, control logic may use the SHGC value of a tintable window at a particular shading level and the SHGC of a reference window to determine energy savings using that shading level. In general, the value of SHGC is the fraction of all wavelengths of incident light that is transmitted through the window. While a reference glass is set forth in many of the embodiments, other standard reference windows may be used. In general, the SHGC of a reference window (eg, reference glass) is a variable that can be different for different geographic locations and window orientations, and based on regulatory requirements specified by individual municipalities. Once modules A, B, and C determine the final shading level, the control logic may receive an override that causes the override value to be used as the final shading value. One type of override is a manual override by an occupant of the room who determines that a particular tinting level (override value) is desired. There may be situations where the manual override itself is overridden. Another example of an override is a high demand (or peak load) override associated with a facility requirement to reduce energy consumption in a building. Once the control logic determines the final shading level, the control logic sends a control signal with shading instructions to transition the tintable window to the final shading level. d. For adjusting artificial interior lighting and / or coloring control logic As mentioned above, the tinting of an electrochromic window or other tintable window can change the wavelength spectrum and associated color of light transmitted through the tinted window to manifest color in a room. For example, certain electrochromic windows in a darker tinted state can impart a blue color in a room. Certain techniques set forth herein relate to control logic for controlling artificial interior lighting to enhance the color appearing from the interior of one or more electrochromic or other tintable windows in a room. These techniques can be used to control the levels of color rendering index (CRI) and/or correlated color temperature (CCT) in a room interior to, for example, improve visual comfort, adjust circadian rhythms, and the like. CRI is a measure of the ability of interior lighting to accurately render all the colors of an object to the human eye. Usually, the CRI value is measured on a scale from 0 to 100%, wherein the higher the CRI value, the better the color rendering. CCT is a temperature measurement of the color characteristic of lighting in the visible spectrum. CCT value is usually measured in degrees Kelvin (K). In certain implementations, techniques involve control logic that determines a current value for the interior CRI of a room, and if the current value is not a desired value, sends a control signal to adjust artificial interior lighting and enhance interior lighting to reveal the desired interior CRI. Additionally or alternatively, certain implementations determine the current value of the interior CCT of the room and/or adjust interior lighting to reveal the desired interior CCT. In these techniques, based on input from exterior sensors located on the outside of the building, interior sensors located in the room, and/or one or more electrochromic windows between the interior of the room and the exterior of the building, Coloring status to determine the current value of the internal CRI/CCT. Some examples of the types of external sensors that can be implemented include infrared sensors, ambient temperature sensors, and visible light sensors. In implementations with one or more exterior sensors, the exterior sensors are positioned generally in contact with the environment outside the building having the room. In some cases, external sensors are located on the facade near the electrochromic window, for example, to determine the irradiance level at the window in order to determine the external CRI/CCT outside the window. In another case, external sensors may be located on the roof of a building. In other cases, external sensors may be located at different buildings. In some cases, external sensor data may be used to forecast weather conditions and communicate the forecast data to a controller that sends control signals to artificial interior lighting for adjustments and/or to electrochromic windows To transform coloring. An example of an arrangement of external sensors that may be used in a multi-sensor device is set forth in detail in US Patent Application 15/287,646, entitled "MULTI-SENSOR," which application is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. Such multi-sensor devices can be installed on the roof of a building. In one embodiment, the multi-sensor device comprises a radially oriented outward facing light sensor having different orientations, a vertically upward facing light sensor, one or more IR sensors and A ring of temperature sensors. In one example, readings from an IR sensor and a temperature sensor can be used to determine cloudiness conditions. Additionally or alternatively, irradiance readings from different radially oriented photosensors may be used to calculate irradiance values at orientations different from those of the photosensors. Using this technique, the external irradiance from a different radially oriented light sensor can be used to determine the external irradiance for a window in another orientation. One example of such technology is set forth in PCT Publication PCT/US15/52822, filed April 7, 2016, entitled "COMBI-SENSOR SYSTEMS," which application is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. Some examples of interior sensors that can be implemented with these technologies include visible light sensors, temperature sensors, and other sensors that can be used to calculate the interior CRI of a room and the CRI of the exterior of a window. Interior sensors may be located at various suitable locations within the room, such as, for example, at or near artificial interior lighting, at or near occupant activity areas such as table or conference table tops, walls, and the like. In addition, an example of a commercially available device for measuring CRI and which can be used as an internal sensor for measuring internal CRI or an external sensor for measuring external CRI is the CL-70F CRI manufactured by Konica Minolta® luminance meter. Another example is the C-700 SpectroMaster manufactured by Sekonic. These techniques can be used for various types of artificial interior lighting, including, for example, incandescent lighting, light emitting diodes (LEDs), and/or fluorescent lighting. A commercially available example of artificial interior lighting that can be used in these embodiments is Hue® manufactured by Phillips® tmPersonal wireless lighting system. Another commercially available example of artificial interior lighting that can be used is the Aurora Lighting Smarter Kit made by nanoleaf® tm. Below is a diagram showing four exemplary scenarios of combinations of inputs that may be used by the control logic to control an internal CRI in a room. While the control logic for these situations is described with reference to a single electrochromic window, it will be understood that the present disclosure is not limiting and that such control logic may be used in rooms with multiple electrochromic windows or other tintable windows. situation external sensor internal sensor Internal Color Rendering Index (CRI) control 1 no no Based on tinted state of glass only 2 no yes Using LED lighting to adjust CRI based on internal sensor readings 3 yes no Based on the external sensor readings and the tinting state of the glass, the internal CRI is determined based on the external CRI, which is transformed into an internal CRI adjusted to the desired CRI using LED lighting 4 yes yes Can be selected for #2, #3 or both (by user or algorithm) In the first case, the internal CRI is controlled based only on the tinting state of the electrochromic window. No input from any internal or external sensors is used to control the internal CRI. In one implementation, each tinting state of the electrochromic window is mapped to a particular internal CRI value or range of internal CRI values (eg, in a look-up table). These values can be calculated in advance, for example, by measuring the CRI values in various colored states of the product glass. The control logic determines the tint state of the electrochromic window mapped to the desired CRI value/range. For example, the darkest shading state (eg, 1% T) may map to an internal CRI value corresponding to appearing blue in the room. In this embodiment, control of the internal CRI value/range may not depend on knowledge of the light conditions outside the electrochromic window. It may depend, for example, on whether the room is occupied, more specifically whether the lights are on. The desired CRI can be preset as a user preference based on the tinted state of the glass. For example, when the tinting state is at a certain level and the lights in the room occupied by the user are on, the interior light can be automatically adjusted to provide a preset CRI. This lighting adjustment can be done after the tinted state of the glass is achieved, or the lighting can be changed dynamically during a change in the tinted state of the glass. In this mode there is no need to enter sensor readings because the CRI is not actively measured, but is preset in advance based on user preference based on measurements and/or calculations. External conditions are not measured (although related to internal CRI), ie, because the glass is in a particular state of tint, it is assumed that external lighting conditions warrant the glass being so tinted, and therefore the CRI is adjusted based solely on the state of tint of the glass. In some embodiments, sensor readings are used to enhance the accuracy of the adjustment of the CRI to a desired value. For example, in the second case, measurements from one or more interior sensors in the room are used to control the interior CRI value of the room. The internal CRI value is determined without using measurements from any external sensors or the tinting state of the electrochromic window. Because electrochromic glass transforms external light as it passes through the glass, external lighting conditions are irrelevant in this embodiment, and one or more internal sensors are used to determine internal lighting conditions and respond accordingly. Adjust internal lighting conditions to obtain proper/desired CRI. Occupancy sensors can be used with light sensors to enhance CRI adjustment. For example, if the room is not currently occupied, the CRI adjustment may be avoided or made a CRI adjustment that is sub-optimal for the occupants and, for example, more consistent with the energy savings of the lighting system. When a room is occupied, CRI adjustments using lighting can override potential energy saving settings in favor of an optimal CRI for the occupant. In one implementation, one or more interior sensors may be calibrated or designed to measure the interior CRI of a room. In another implementation, ranges of internal sensor measurements may be mapped to internal CRI values (or ranges), such as in a lookup table. Control logic determines in this example that the internal sensor measurement is within a particular range and determines the CRI value associated with that range. In this second scenario, artificial interior lighting is adjusted based on interior sensing measurements. Measurements from interior sensors control adjustments made to artificial interior lighting. In some embodiments, internal sensor measurements are used as input to adjust only the internal CRI to user preference to achieve desired results. In another embodiment, the control logic compares the measured internal CRI value to the proper/desired value and if there is a difference, the control signal adjusts the artificial interior lighting based on the difference to enhance the interior lighting in the room. In the third case, the desired internal CRI value for the room (also referred to herein as "internal CRI") is obtained using measurements from one or more external sensors and the tinting state. The control logic calculates or measures (eg, using a multi-sensor device) an extrinsic CRI (also referred to herein as "extrinsic CRI"). Based on the tinting state of the electrochromic glass, the control logic converts the external CRI to the internal CRI by calculating the internal CRI based on the external CRI and the known light absorption and color changing properties of the glass. The control logic then sends a signal to artificial lighting (eg, LED lighting) to tune to a better or custom CRI value in the room (logic makes this comparison if the calculated internal CRI is not already at the better level). In this third case, measurements from internal sensors are not used. Since the electrochromic glass transforms the external light when it passes through the tinted glass, the internal CRI can be calculated based on the measurement results of the external CRI and the tinted state of the glass. Interior lighting conditions are not required. External CRI may be based on measurements taken by one or more external sensors. In one implementation, the one or more exterior sensors may be calibrated or designed to measure exterior CRI near windows and/or generally near building areas. In another implementation, ranges of external sensor measurements may be mapped to external CRI values (or ranges), such as in a lookup table. The control logic uses the external CRI value and the tint state characteristic of the glass to obtain the internal CRI value and then adjusts it to match the desired value if it does not already match it. In one implementation, different combinations of shading states and external CRI values can be mapped to specific internal CRI values. For example, assuming that the curtain wall of windows is all in the same tinting state, one internal CRI can be obtained, but if one or more windows in the curtain wall are tinted to a different tinting state, a different internal CRI value is obtained and can be obtained by corresponding Change the interior lighting to adjust the interior CRI value. In one embodiment, the inner CRI is only adjusted based on a calculated value based on the state of the window and the measured outer CRI. In another embodiment, the control logic compares the calculated internal CRI value to the desired result. In another embodiment, the control logic compares the measured internal CRI value to the proper/desired value and if there is a difference, the control signal adjusts the artificial interior lighting based on the difference to enhance the interior lighting in the room. In a fourth scenario, the control logic uses user input to determine whether to control the room based on measurements from one or more external sensors and/or based on measurements from one or more internal sensors In-house CRI. That is, a combination of the second case and the third case, for example, based on user preference and/or the accuracy of the method (internal sensors, external sensors, or both), which may depend on internal and external CRI measurement accuracy (which may vary with lighting conditions and the accuracy or effectiveness of the sensor in those conditions (eg, cloudy conditions for external sensors)). If the user input selects that external sensors are to be used, the control logic uses measurements from one or more external sensors to determine the internal CRI in the room according to the third scenario set forth above. If the user input selects that internal sensors are to be used, the control logic uses measurements from one or more internal sensors to determine internal CRI according to the second scenario set forth above. The control logic then sends control signals to adjust the artificial interior lighting to enhance the interior lighting in the room to be at or near the desired interior CRI. In other embodiments, sensors are used to determine the external CRI, and thus a more accurate determination of the internal CRI can be made by calculation or by means of internal sensor measurements. The user selects a preference or algorithm based on preset criteria, whether or not using one or both of interior and exterior sensors to determine exterior and/or interior lighting conditions as input to determine an appropriate interior CRI. The importance of the fourth embodiment is that the sensors (internal and/or external) are more useful in some environmental conditions than in others. For example, it may be the case that when overcast conditions are dominant outside, the external sensors are less efficient to provide accurate data for input to the control logic, and only the internal sensors are used to determine and adjust the internal CRT more accurate. While these four scenarios are set forth above in terms of adjusting the artificial interior lighting such that the lighting in the room is at or near the desired interior CRI, it will be understood that in other embodiments, adjusting the artificial interior lighting can be used to alter the lighting in the room to match CRI and CCT, or a specific default value of CCT. In certain implementations of these techniques for adjusting artificial interior lighting, a user may input settings for adjusting artificial interior lighting. In one embodiment, in the fourth scenario, the user may determine whether to use the interior and/or exterior sensors to control the interior CRI of the room. For example, a user may be a building system administrator who chooses to use external sensors when there are no internal sensors in the room or when internal sensors are not operational. In another embodiment, the user provides the CRI and/or CCT settings used in the room. A user can, for example, place a mobile device, a wall mount (such as, for example, picture twenty three) or other suitable computing device in communication with one or more controllers executing the control logic via a communication network. In some cases, the user may enter schedules with different preferred CRI and/or CCT settings to use at different times of day and days of the year. In other cases, a user may enter an override setting. In another embodiment, the user can select which type or combination of sensor inputs to use to determine the interior CRI of a room. For example, according to the third scenario, the user may choose to use weather forecast data obtained from a specific combination of external sensors to determine internal CRI. In some cases, these external sensors may be located at a separate building and the weather forecast data transmitted to a controller at the building with the room via the communications network. In some embodiments, the control software automatically takes ambient weather conditions as input into account to adjust the internal CRI and whether external and/or internal sensors are used. In one embodiment, the control logic is learned from historical data entered by the user. For example, instances of CRI/CCT settings entered by one or more users in the room and the associated time of that entry (day of year and time of day) may be stored in memory as historical data. Appropriate CRI/CCT settings can be made when evaluating trends in historical data to predict future times. For example, an occupant of a room may select a specific CRI setting every day at the same time every weekday. The control logic stores this information as historical data, evaluates this historical data as a trend, and sets the desired internal CRI level to this setting at (or just before) that same time during the weekdays of the following week. In this way, the control logic can automatically adjust its CRI/CCT settings to suit user preferences. According to certain embodiments, the control logic for the above situations is incorporated into predictive logic that determines the tinting state of one or more electrochromic windows and/or adjusts the interior lighting to obtain the desired color at a future time. Internal CRIs. In the above subsections is set forth a description of the Intelligence® available from View, Inc. of Milpitas, California that can be used to calculate the tint state of one or more electrochromic windows to take occupant comfort and/or energy considerations into account. Instances of Logical Modules Module A, Module B, and Module C. Another example of other predictive control logic for determining the tint state of an electrochromic window is set forth in U.S. Patent Application 15/347,677, filed May 7, 2015, and entitled "CONTROL METHOD FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS," which The application is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. picture twenty twoIt is a flowchart of a method according to one embodiment 2200, the method implements predictive control logic for controlling the interior CRI of a room having one or more electrochromic windows. Although this method is described with respect to electrochromic windows, the method can be practiced with other tintable windows. in operation 2220, the control logic uses one or more of modules A, B, and C to calculate the tinting level of one or more electrochromic windows in the room at a future time. In one case, the future time used in the calculation may be a time far enough in the future to allow the window to complete the transition after receiving the control signal with the shading instruction. Details about modules A, B, and C are set forth in the above subsections. Modules A, B, and C output tint levels, sensor readings (interior and/or exterior), window configuration including orientation, time of day, time of year for one or more electrochromic windows at a future time the day of the day, the weather conditions that may exist, and other data used by these modules. in operation 2230, the predictive control logic determines the desired/appropriate internal CRI at a future time. In some embodiments, the desired internal CRI is preset as a user preference. In one example, the desired interior CRI may be based on trends in historical data of user input for controlling artificial interior lighting in a room. As another example, the desired internal CRI may be an override value entered by the user. Additionally or alternatively, the desired internal CRI may be based on scheduling information. In some cases, this schedule can be determined or adjusted by the user. In other cases, the control logic may adjust the schedule based on historical data. in operation 2250, the control logic determines adjustments to the interior lighting and/or the tint state of the electrochromic windows to obtain the desired/proper interior CRI in the room. For example, the control logic may determine the type of light to activate, one or more colors or lights to activate, the intensity level settings for the lights to activate, the location of the lights to activate, the number and arrangement of lights to activate, etc. . Once an adjustment is determined, the control logic sends control signals for adjusting the tinting state of the artificial interior lighting and/or electrochromic windows in the room (operating 2260). method then returns to the operation 2220. In an implementation according to the first scenario, the interior CRI of a room is determined based on the tinting state of one or more electrochromic windows. In one example, when the tint status from modules A, B, and C is at a certain level, and the interior lighting is on in a room occupied by the user, the control logic automatically determines the adjustment and sends a control signal to automatically adjust the interior lighting. Lamp to provide user-preset internal CRI. According to an implementation of the second scenario, measurements from one or more interior sensors in the room are used to determine the interior CRI value of the room. In one example, the control logic automatically determines adjustments to interior lighting and/or tinting levels that adjust the CRI value to the desired level. According to an implementation of the third scenario, measurements from one or more external sensors may be used to determine the external CRI converted to internal CRI based on the tinting level of one or more electrochromic windows. For example, assuming that the curtain walls of windows are all in the same tinting state, one internal CRI can be obtained, but if one or more windows in the curtain wall of windows are tinted to different tinting states, a different internal CRI value is obtained and can be obtained by This different interior CRI value is adjusted by changing the interior lighting accordingly. In one embodiment, the inner CRI is only adjusted based on a calculated value based on the tinting state of the window and the measured outer CRI. According to an implementation of the fourth scenario, measurements from one or more external sensors and/or internal sensors may be used to determine the internal CRI as described above with respect to the first and second scenarios And determine the adjustment. In certain embodiments, based on the four scenarios, the predictive control logic with modules A, B, and C also includes an override logic module. In this embodiment, the override logic module may adjust (override) the tint state of one or more electrochromic windows determined by modules A, B, and C and/or adjust the interior lighting to achieve Required CRI. For example, when implementing the third case, the control logic can determine whether to use the tinting state output from modules A, B, and C, the curtain wall of the window will be in the darkest tinting state at a future time. In such a case, in order to obtain a proper CRI, the interior lighting will need to be adjusted to a high intensity setting at a future time. The control logic can also determine that proper CRI can be obtained without interior lighting turned on if a subset of windows remains in a lower tinted state. In this example, the control logic may decide to adjust a subset of the windows to a lower tinted state at a future time and not adjust the interior lighting. e. Dynamic awareness of occupancy input and occupant position In certain implementations, control logic is used to control the tinting state of each tinting zone of a multi-zone tintable window, individual windows in a group (or zone) of windows, or a combination thereof. In some cases, the control logic first determines whether the room with the window is occupied or unoccupied. Control logic may be based on one or more data, such as, for example, scheduling information, occupancy sensor data, asset tracking information or other occupant tracking data, via a remote control or such as picture twenty threeThe wall units shown in are derived from one or more of the user's activation data, etc., to make their determinations. The remote control may be in the form of a handheld device such as a smartphone or may be a computing device such as a laptop. For example, control logic may determine that a room is occupied if the scheduling information indicates that an occupant is likely to be in the room. As another example, control logic may determine that a room is occupied based on readings from occupancy sensors. In another example, the control logic may determine that a room is occupied if an occupant has entered information indicating occupancy at the manual control panel of the wall unit or remote control. If the room is occupied, the control logic determines whether a glare condition exists in the occupied or potentially occupied area. The control logic determines the tinting status of the tinting zone based on the occupant's location in the room. For example, the state of shading can be determined to avoid glare on a table or other area that may be presumably occupied or occupied. In some cases, the occupant's current location is based on information retrieved from an occupancy lookup table. In other cases, the occupant's current location is based on data in signals from sensors (eg, occupancy sensors). The sensors can generate a signal with the occupant's location in the room. The window controller can receive this signal. As another example, a user may provide information about an occupant's location in a room, such as via a control panel in the room. picture twenty threeis a photograph of an example of a wall unit with a manual control panel according to an embodiment. In some aspects, a method of control determines the tinting status of a tinting zone in a multi-zone tintable window having a daylighting tinting zone. In such cases, the control method determines the state of shading to maximize daylighting while controlling glare and/or heat load from solar radiation entering the room. In some aspects, the user may use a control panel (e.g., a manual control panel in a room or a computer interface) to select a "lighting mode" or "uniform mode," another predetermined mode, or a user-defined one. model. For example, a user may be able to customize different tinting states for regions of windows in a room, eg, "User 1 - Mode 1". In the "lighting mode", the control method determines the transparent coloring state or the coloring state that is brighter than other coloring areas for the lighting coloring area of the window. In Uniform Mode, the control method judges the shading state of an area based on a different standard than that used for daylighting. e. Multi-zone preference / Feedback notification of occupancy mode In some aspects, the control logic used to control the tinting state of tinting areas/windows is informed based on feedback of preferences and occupancy patterns. For example, the location of occupants at different times/dates, as determined by sensors, from user input, etc., can be stored as occupancy patterns. These occupancy locations at different times/dates can be used to predict the occupant's location at a future time. The control method may then control the shaded state based on the predicted occupant locations. As another example, user input selecting certain shaded states at certain times for different shaded regions may be stored. Such tinting choices by the user can be used to predict the likely desired tinting state in the room. The control method can then control the shading state according to these predicted shading states desired by the user. F. Projection of light into a room for judging glare conditions In some embodiments, the control logic includes instructions to determine whether direct sunlight passing through the tinted zone creates a glare condition in the occupied area by calculating the three-dimensional projection of light from the tinted zone in the room. The three-dimensional projection of light can be thought of as a volume of light in which external light in the room falls directly into the room. For example, a three-dimensional projection can be defined by parallel rays from the sun passing through the tinted zones of a multi-zone window. The direction of the 3D projection into the room is based on solar azimuth and/or solar altitude, which can be calculated by a solar calculator based on the time of day and the longitude and latitude coordinates of the window. Three-dimensional projections of light can be used to determine intersections with occupied areas in a room. The control logic determines the lightcast at a particular plane and determines the amount by which the lightcast or a glare area associated with the lightcast overlaps the occupied area. If the light projection system is outside the occupied area, it is determined that there is no glare situation. Details of the control logic for determining glare situations using three-dimensional projections of light are set forth in PCT application PCT/US15/29675, filed May 5, 2015, and entitled "CONTROL METHOD FOR TINTABLE WINDOWS," which application is hereby incorporated by reference The method is integrated as a whole. picture 24A, picture 24Band picture 24Cfor each having room (vertical walls not shown) according to one embodiment 2400Schematic diagram of the perspective view of the room with the exterior of the building and the room 2400Multi-zone windows in vertical walls between interiors 2410, the multi-zone window has the first shaded zone 2412and the second colored area 2414. picture 24A, picture 24Band picture 28CThree different situations of sunlight are shown separately, where the sunlight is in three different directions associated with different positions of the sun 2450, 2460, 2470(shown as dotted arrow) shines through the multi-zone window 2410. In the example shown, the room 2400Occupied area having the location or potential location of the occupant 2450. occupied area 2450This could be, for example, a desk or another workplace. In this instance, occupying the area 2450defined as a room 2400A two-dimensional area on the floor. exist picture 24A, picture 24Band picture 28CIn each of the illustrated examples shown in , sunlight (shown as directional arrows) illuminates the multi-zone window 2410the first coloring area 2412and the second colored area 2414. According to one aspect, the control logic decides to pass through the two shaded regions based on the position of the sun 2412, 2414each of and across the room 2400projection of light. Control logic decision goes through two shaded regions 2412, 2414Each of the light and include two-dimensional footprint 24502D light projection at the intersection of the plane of the room 2400The surface of the floor is coplanar. exist picture 24A, showing passing through the first shaded region 2412first two-dimensional light projection 2416, and draw across the room 2400Second colored area on the floor 2414The second two-dimensional light projection of 2418. exist picture 24B, showing passing through the first shaded region 2412first two-dimensional light projection 2416, and draw across the room 2400Second colored area on the floor 2414The second two-dimensional light projection of 2420. exist picture 24C, showing passing through the first shaded region 2412first two-dimensional light projection 2426, and draw across the room 2400Second colored area on the floor 2414The second two-dimensional light projection of 2428. The control logic then determines whether the two-dimensional lightcast from the shaded region intersects the occupied area. If the two-dimensional lightcast intersects the occupied area, the control logic places (remains in or transitions to) the corresponding shaded region in a darkened shaded state. Although two colored regions are shown, it will be understood that additional regions and/or differently positioned colored regions would be suitable using a similar approach. exist picture 24AIn the first case shown in , for example, passing through the colored area 2412, 2414two-dimensional light projection 2416, 2416Neither occupied area 2450intersect. In this case, the shaded area 2412, 2414Put in a clear state. exist picture 24BIn the second case shown in , the first 2D light projection 2420and occupied area 2450intersects, and the second 2D ray casts 2422does not occupy the area 2450intersect. In this case, the first shaded area 2412Put in a darkened shading state to avoid glare situations. Due to the second two-dimensional light projection 2422unoccupied area 2450intersects, so the second shaded region 2414Put in a clear state. exist picture 24CIn the third case shown in , the first 2D light projection 2426and second two-dimensional light projection 2428and occupied area 2450intersect. In this case, the first shaded area 2412and the second colored area 2414Place a darkened shading state to fill in occupied areas 2450Avoid glare situations. Although picture 24A ,picture 24Band picture 24CThe example shown in includes a multi-zone tintable window, but similar techniques would apply to separate and adjacent tintable windows. For example, a room may have two separate and adjacent tintable windows in the vertical wall between the exterior of the building and the interior of the room. Using control logic, three-dimensional projections of light from each tintable window are directed through the room based on the position of the sun. The control logic determines the two-dimensional lightcast through each window at the plane of the occupied area. The control logic then determines whether the two-dimensional lightcasts from each window intersect the occupied area. If the two-dimensional lightcast intersects the occupied area, the control logic places (remains in or transitions to) the corresponding window in a dimmed tinted state. G. Used to control glare, ambient light level and color and / or control logic for ratio Certain embodiments relate to control logic that adjusts artificial lighting and/or tinting of tintable windows to provide relatively constant brightness levels and ambient spectral content in an occupied area. Typically, the control logic adjusts the artificial lighting and/or the tinting of the tintable windows so that the combined light illuminating the surfaces of objects in the occupied area resembles the natural spectrum so that illuminated objects reflect their true colors. While typically set to a natural spectrum, the ambient spectrum content can alternatively be customized for the current occupant to provide, for example, soothing light, light therapy to adjust circadian rhythms, or provide restorative healing, etc. By adjusting the tinting state of the tintable window, the control logic can control the direct sunlight (glare) passing through the tintable window and the color imparted by light projection through the window (eg, blue light). By adjusting the artificial lighting, the control logic can offset the effects of glare and adjust the color of the environment. Combined control of the shading state and artificial lighting can provide relatively constant ambient light levels and spectral content at desired levels in an occupied area. In one aspect, the control logic can control the adjustable artificial lighting to adjust the color (wavelength range), illumination level, and/or direction of illumination of the illumination. Such adjustments may be selected to increase occupant comfort by reducing glare and improving ambient spectral content and/or reducing contrast ratios in occupied areas. For example, the control logic may control the wavelength and lumen/illuminance settings of the adjustable artificial lighting to shift the contrast ratio in the occupied area. An example of tunable indoor artificial lighting is the BLT series of tunable white LEDs sold by Lithonia Lighting ® which are tunable to different illumination levels varying between 0 and 1000 lux (100%) and between 2700 Kelvin and 6500 Kelvin Adjust the color between. Additionally or alternatively, the adjustable artificial lighting may have multiple light sources in different positions and/or have light sources that are movable to change the direction of light. Control logic can control various light sources of artificial lighting to illuminate certain areas. For example, indoor artificial lighting can be adjusted to direct light to occupied areas with occupants affected by external glare through tinted windows. Reflected light is a combination of light reflected from artificial light and light cast to produce a more uniform intensity and color in an occupied area. This reduces occupant perceived glare, which increases occupant comfort and productivity. As used herein, "negative setting" refers to the setting of an adjustable artificial light source that provides illumination in a wavelength range that is shifted from the color of light passing through a tinted window. For example, if a tintable window in its darkest state imparts a blue color to light passing through the window, the offset color for a negative setting would be red light or a combination of red and yellow light. In this example, an adjustable artificial light source in the negative setting would provide red or red and yellow illumination. In one aspect, the control logic activates a negative setting for the adjustable indoor artificial lighting to direct light to an occupied area with a light cast through a tinted window to offset the effects of glare and color from the light cast. Reducing strong contrast at the interface between portions of a surface illuminated by different illumination sources of different intensities can improve occupant visual comfort. In certain implementations, the control logic adjusts the functionality of the building system based on the current contrast ratio in the area determined based on feedback from the building system. For example, the contrast ratio in an area (such as an occupied area or other surrounding area) may be determined based on the current illumination and/or color of light in the area. Current illumination and color can be determined from one or more of: measurements from one or more sensors in the building (e.g., cameras, thermal sensors, etc.), the current setting and location of artificial lighting wait. An example of a device with sensors that can measure the illuminance and color of ambient light is a spectrometer, such as, for example, the commercially available C-7000 spectromaster manufactured by Sekonic®. The control logic adjusts the functionality of the building systems to adjust the contrast ratio in the area to an acceptable level. For example, the building systems may be adjusted such that the contrast ratio is below an acceptable range or below a maximum limit. As another example, the building systems can be tuned so that contrast ratios are maintained within acceptable levels based on look-up tables of illuminance and color for artificial lighting that can be used to offset The reflected light of the light projection of the electrochromic window. picture 25is a plot of measured illuminance (lux) versus measured color temperature (Kelvin) according to one embodiment. The figure shows three distinct regions: an upper region described as warm and colorful, looking red, a middle region described as pleasing, and a lower region described as cool and dark, appearing blue. This image includes four distances taken at 12:30 pm from the window in its darkest tint state with the artificial lighting turned on at full brightness level and set to 2700 Kelvin The four points of the measured values of illuminance and color temperature. If the artificial lighting is off, the illuminance and color temperature will likely be in the lower area. As shown, the measurement results when the artificial lighting is on shifts the blue light, bringing the measured illuminance and color temperature into the middle and upper regions. Examples of look-up tables include interior artificial light settings (color temperature in Kelvin and brightness level in lux) that will be displayed at specific times of day in occupied areas at different distances from tinted windows While maintaining the contrast ratio within an acceptable level for different coloring states. In one aspect, control logic may use such a lookup table to determine the setting of the internal artificial light that will maintain the contrast ratio within acceptable levels. In certain embodiments, the control logic makes adjustments to artificial lighting settings and tint status of tintable windows based on feedback received from building systems to provide occupant-specific or more generally work-friendly windows in occupied areas. Brightness levels and ambient spectral content for site design. The feedback may include, for example, the current tinting status of tintable windows, information about the presence or likely presence of occupants in an occupied area or workplace, measured levels of illuminance and color of ambient light, information about occupants Data (such as age, gender and circadian rhythm), information about occupied areas or workplaces, etc. This feedback information can come from readings or decisions about data obtained by building systems or can come from scheduling information based on historical data. Control logic can adjust artificial lighting and tinting to produce specific spectral content and brightness levels tailored to occupants or the usage environment (eg, residential, general, commercial) of the workplace. More details about this control logic will be described in the next subsection. In one aspect, you can use and refer to picture twenty twoThe method described is similar to the method to implement the logic for controlling the contrast ratio in the occupied area of a room with one or more tintable windows. In this method, the control logic uses one or more of modules A, B, and C to calculate the tinting level of one or more tintable windows in the room at a future time. In one case, the future time used in the calculation may be a time far enough in the future to allow the window to complete the transition after receiving the control signal with the shading instruction. Modules A, B, and C output tint level, sensor readings (interior and/or exterior), window configuration including orientation, time of day, day of year for one or more tintable windows at a time in the future , weather conditions as the case may exist and other data used by these modules. The predictive control logic determines the acceptable contrast ratio at a future time. The control logic then determines adjustments to the interior lighting and/or the tint state of the tintable windows to obtain a contrast ratio in the room that is below or at an acceptable level. For example, the control logic may determine the type of light to activate, one or more colors or lights to activate, the intensity level settings for the lights to activate, the location of the lights to activate, the number and arrangement of lights to activate, etc. . Once an adjustment is determined, the control logic sends control signals for adjusting the tinting state of the artificial interior lighting and/or electrochromic windows in the room, and then the method returns to modules A, B, and C again. H. Control logic for scenarios designed by occupants Certain embodiments relate to control logic for maintaining scenarios of environmental factors designed to provide occupant satisfaction and comfort levels in a workplace, such as visual comfort, thermal comfort, acoustic comfort, and air quality. The control logic maintains the environmental factors by making adjustments to the settings of the building systems. The control logic designs environmental factors based on various feedback received from, for example, building systems, occupants, building management systems, and the like. Some examples of feedback that may be used include the current state of tinting of tintable windows, data about the presence or likely presence of occupants, measured levels of illuminance and color of ambient light, data about occupants such as age, gender, etc. and circadian rhythm), noise data, ambient temperature data, air quality data, data on available building systems, etc. From the feedback, the control logic determines occupancy, which includes the presence and location of one or more occupants in the workplace. The control logic determines occupancy based on various information, such as scheduling information, sensor measurements, input from occupants, or data from a mapping system. Examples of such mapping systems include transmitters and receivers for transmitting radio frequency, microwave or other electromagnetic waves. Received transmissions can be used to map the current location of occupants and other objects in the workplace. The control logic is also developed for each occupant and/or workplace use case to determine parameters for determining the scene, such as occupant type, workplace type, temporal composition of the surrounding environment (illumination level, ambient light color, noise level, air quality, etc.), dwell duration, building considerations (such as energy and cost), and existing building systems that can be used to alter the surrounding environment. Based on the use case, the control logic designs a scenario that includes all environmental factors, or some portion of the environmental factors, depending on which technologies or controls are in effect at the workplace. Environmental factors may be grouped into categories such as, for example, thermal settings, visual settings, acoustic settings, and air quality settings. The duration of dwell in the workplace is a consideration of some environmental factors such as noise and air quality. For each occupant and/or workplace, control logic determines the environmental factors to be used in the scenario and determines target levels for the environmental factors. Design the classes to meet occupant needs or expectations by determining which classes are designed for that use case. The control logic then determines any new control settings for the building system and communicates those new settings to the building system, eg, via the BMC or BAC. In one aspect, data from industry best practices are used to initialize use case-specific scenarios and then modify the scenarios based on feedback from occupants, building management systems, and/or the industry. Control logic modifies or updates the scenarios based on new environmental factors. For example, the control logic may receive feedback from buildings with unanticipated settings that provide non-intuitive "pleasures" that better match or exceed occupant expectations for workplace settings. In another aspect, the control logic may initialize the scenario for a particular use case based on input from the current occupant, such as based on a series of queries to the occupant at a user interface. In one aspect, scenarios for a particular use case are modified based on feedback from occupants, building systems, building management systems, industry, and any other suitable source of feedback. For example, the control logic may receive overrides or positive or negative feedback from occupants regarding environmental factors of a particular scene. The control logic may determine a new level of the environmental factor of the scene based on the feedback. Some examples of workplace types include private offices, sanctuaries, nooks, contemplative rooms, thinking rooms, huddle rooms, open offices, loud areas, waiting areas, transition areas, meeting rooms, creative thinking spaces, foyers, plazas, restaurants and office space. picture 26is a schematic diagram of a building showing various types of workplaces according to one embodiment. In the example shown, workplaces are grouped into "workplaces for personal work" including workstations and low tables, "workplaces for open collaboration" including individual couches, conference tables, and small meeting rooms, including editing rooms, chat rooms , thinking rooms, meeting rooms, meeting rooms, and meeting rooms; Regional Workplace". The control logic determines use cases based in part on the type of workplace. For example, private offices are often used for focused tasks or creative activities. As a result, private offices require scenes with ambient settings of warm temperatures and warm ambient light. In addition to designing scenes for maximum efficiency, scenes can also be designed to match occupants' expectations of a well-thought-out workplace. For example, a restaurant needs a scene with light levels (illuminance) and background noise that are vibrant and encourage communication and socializing. In this example, the occupant's expectation of the scene in the restaurant would be brighter, noisier and cooler. A private office generally refers to an area used for concentrated work or rest without distraction. A private office can be, for example, an enclosed space, semi-sheltered or sheltered space in an open plan. An example of environmental factors for a scene designed for visual comfort in a private office includes a brightness level of 500-700 lux (low) and a color temperature of 4000K (warm). Another example of environmental factors for a scene designed for visual comfort in a private office includes a brightness level of 1000 lux to 2000 lux (high) and a color temperature of 6000K (cool). One example of an environmental factor for a scenario designed for thermal comfort in a private office includes a temperature of 25°C (warm). An example of environmental factors designed for acoustic comfort in a private office includes a sound level of 45 dB and a privacy index of 75%. Another example of environmental factors for a scenario designed for acoustic comfort in a private office includes a sound level of 35 dB and a privacy index of 95%. An example of environmental factors for scenarios designed for air quality in private offices includes 500 ppm of CO 2content. Similar to a private office, a thinking room or small meeting room is also an area for concentrating work or taking a break without distraction. Thinking rooms or small meeting rooms are designed to have less privacy for occupants than private offices. Thinking rooms or small meeting rooms can also be enclosed, semi-sheltered or sheltered spaces in an open plan. An example of environmental factors for a scene designed for visual comfort in a thinking room or small conference room includes a brightness level of 1000-2000 lux (high) and a color temperature of 6000K (cool). An example of an environmental factor for a scenario designed for thermal comfort in a thinking room or small conference room includes a brightness level of 22°C to 25°C (moderate). An example of environmental factors for a scenario designed for acoustic comfort in a thinking room or small conference room includes a sound level of 55 dB to 75 dB and a privacy index of 55%. An example of an environmental factor for a scenario designed for air quality control in a thinking room or small meeting room includes 500 ppm of CO 2content. Waiting or transition areas generally refer to waiting/gathering areas adjacent to conference rooms and/or private offices. Waiting or transition areas are designed for short stops with visibility and semi-private communication. An example of environmental factors for a scene designed for visual comfort in a waiting area or transition area includes a brightness level of 500 lux to 1500 lux (high) and a color temperature of 4500 to 6000K (cool). An example of an environmental factor for a scene designed for thermal comfort in a waiting area or transition area includes a brightness level of 22°C to 25°C (moderate). An example of environmental factors for a scenario designed for acoustic comfort in a waiting area or transition area includes a sound level of 55 dB and a privacy index of 50% to 75%. An example of an environmental factor for a scenario designed for air quality control in a waiting area or transition area includes 1500 ppm of CO 2content. A conference room generally refers to an area for sharing and discussion that requires appropriate light and high signal-to-noise ratio. One example of environmental factors for a scene designed for visual comfort in a conference room includes a brightness level of 500 lux to 1500 lux (high) and a color temperature of 3500 to 4500K (medium). An example of an environmental factor for a scenario designed for thermal comfort in a conference room is a brightness level of 20°C to 23°C (moderate). An example of environmental factors for a scenario designed for acoustic comfort in a conference room includes a sound level of 44 dB to 55 dB and a privacy index of 80% to 95%. An example of environmental factors for scenarios designed for air quality control in conference rooms includes 1000 ppm of CO 2content. A public office, foyer, or social area generally refers to a dynamic, social environment in a building's primary gathering place, where mixing and connection takes precedence over privacy or work output. An example of environmental factors for a scene designed for visual comfort in a public office, foyer or social place includes a brightness level of 500-1500 lux (high) and a color temperature of 4000K-6000K (medium). An example of an environmental factor for a scene designed for thermal comfort in public offices, foyers or social spaces is a brightness level of 22°C to 25°C (moderate). An example of environmental factors for scenarios designed for acoustic comfort in public offices, foyers, or social spaces include sound levels of 55 dB to 70 dB and a privacy index of 25%. An example of environmental factors for scenarios designed for air quality control in public offices, foyers, or social spaces include 1500 ppm to 3000 ppm CO 2content. picture 27Control logic for illustrating methods of designing and maintaining scenarios in a workplace that provide occupant satisfaction and environmental factors of various comfort levels such as, for example, visual comfort, thermal comfort, acoustic comfort, and air quality flow chart 2700. The control logic can be executed by one or more controllers. A workplace may be a room in a building or an area within a room. in operation 2710wherein the control logic receives input from occupants, assets within the building, or building systems such as, for example, a window controller for controlling the tinting status of one or more tintable windows in a workplace, an HVAC system, a user Feedback in controlling artificial lighting (interior and/or exterior), lighting systems, security systems, one or more sensors, mapping systems, noise and sound control systems, etc.). For example, feedback can be received from an asset that the occupant is carrying with them, such as a smart phone or other smart device. As another example, an occupant can control a panel via a smart device, a manual control panel (e.g., picture twenty threedevice shown in ) or other devices to feed back into the control logic. Some examples of feedback that may be used by the control logic include the current tinting status of one or more tintable windows in the workplace, data regarding the presence or likely presence of one or more occupants in the workplace, ambient light illuminance and color measurements or other sensor readings, occupant data, ambient temperature data, air quality data, noise or other acoustic data, information about available building systems, etc. In one aspect, the predictive control logic of one or more modules (such as reference picture twenty twodescribed) to determine the tinting state of the one or more tintable windows. Some examples of occupant data include age, gender, occupation, circadian rhythm, activity, vital signs, and the like. In one aspect, the control logic uses the vital signs to determine the occupant's circadian rhythm. refer to picture 16and picture 18Some examples of building systems are described in detail. refer to picture 15, picture 19and picture 20Some examples of window controllers are described in detail. Feedback from building systems is typically received via a communications network. based on operating 2710In response to the received feedback, the control logic decides to occupy ( 2720), including the presence and location of one or more occupants in the workplace. The control logic may determine occupancy based on information such as current time, schedule data, sensor data, input from occupants, data in signals from assets carried by occupants, and data from mapping systems. In one aspect, a mapping system of transmitters and receivers of radio frequency, microwave or other electromagnetic waves in a building may be used to map the current location of occupants and other objects present in the workplace. An example of such a mapping system based on window antennas is set forth in U.S. Patent Application 15/709,339, filed September 19, 2017, and entitled "WINDOW ANTENNAS FOR EMITTING RADIO FREQUENCY SIGNALS," which application is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. enter. In another aspect, the control logic may determine that there is a high probability that an occupant is present at the workplace based on scheduling data and the current time. In another aspect, an asset that a particular occupant has with him (eg, a cell phone) has a transmitter that transmits a radio frequency signal that is received at a receiver in the building. Based on the received signals, the building management system or other controller determines the presence and location of the occupants and sends a signal with this information to the controller implementing the control logic. in operation 2730In , the control logic is developed for specific occupant and/or workplace use cases. The use case includes one or more of the following: type of occupancy in the workplace, type of activity in the workplace, type of workplace, temporal composition of the surrounding environment, duration of occupant stay, any building considerations ( types and availability of controls such as energy conservation), building systems, or other technologies that can be used to modify environmental factors. Types of occupancy include information such as age, gender, occupation, circadian rhythm, and vital signs of one or more occupants. The type of activity can be, for example, working, painting, drawing, meeting guests, eating, private thinking, sleeping, resting, hanging out, waiting, gathering, and the like. The temporal composition of the surrounding environment includes various parameters such as illuminance and color of ambient light, contrast ratio, noise, temperature, humidity and air quality. in operation 2740, the control logic determines, for the use case, scenarios of environmental factors designed to improve occupant satisfaction and comfort (eg, visual, thermal, acoustic, and/or air quality) in the workplace. In one aspect, building considerations are taken into consideration in addition to occupant satisfaction and comfort. The control logic determines which environmental factors to include in the scene based at least in part on the types and controls of building systems or other technologies available to alter the surrounding environment. In one aspect, the control logic also considers dwell duration when determining whether to include noise and air quality factors. For example, if the dwell duration is less than 5 minutes, the control logic may not include noise and air quality environmental factors. For each environmental factor in the scene, the control logic determines a target setting or level. Environmental factors are grouped into categories including, for example, thermal settings, visual settings, acoustic settings, and air quality settings. Examples of thermal settings include target levels for temperature, airflow, and humidity. Some examples of visual settings include illuminance and color of ambient light, contrast ratio, and target level of glare. For example, the target level for contrast ratio can be to remain below the maximum acceptable contrast ratio or to be within an acceptable range of values. Acoustic settings include sound or noise levels and a privacy index that factors in walls and open space in a room. The Privacy Index reflects the ability to have conversational confidentiality in the workplace. Some examples of air quality settings include, for example, CO 2and/or one or more pollutants (such as CO, O 3, NO 2, SO 2, PM 10, PM 2.5and lead) content. Some examples of scenarios for target environmental factors including brightness level (illuminance), color temperature, sound level, privacy index, and air quality are provided above for various types of workplaces. The control logic determines the context of the particular use case's environmental factors by matching all or most of the parameters of the particular use case to the context associated with the context stored in the database. If the database does not have a matching scene, the control logic initializes the environmental factors for the scene. In one example, the control logic uses data from industry best practices to initialize the environmental factors for a particular use case scenario. In another example, the control logic uses data from the occupants to initialize the scene, such as by querying the occupants for a better environment setting. In another example, the control logic initializes the scene using data from occupants with a similar set of parameters in the use case. In one embodiment, after the control logic determines a first scenario of environmental factors for a particular use case, the control logic further modifies the environmental factors to generate a second scenario based on additional feedback from buildings with unanticipated settings , these settings provide non-intuitive "joys" that better match or exceed occupant expectations for workplace settings. will be operating 2740The selected scenes are saved to the database. In one aspect, scenarios for a particular use case are modified based on feedback from occupants, building systems, building management systems, industry, and any other suitable source of feedback. For example, the control logic may receive overrides or positive or negative feedback from occupants regarding environmental levels of a particular scene. The control logic may determine a new level of the environmental factor of the scene based on the feedback. in operation 2750, the control logic determines the control settings for the various building systems that will result in operating 2740Target environmental ratings for scenarios designed for occupants or workplaces. For example, the control logic may use a look-up table to determine the appropriate control settings that will produce the target environmental factor. in operation 2760In, the control logic transmits the control settings to the controllers of various building systems building systems or building management systems or building control systems. The control logic then returns to the operating 2710. While certain embodiments are described herein with respect to independently controlling multiple tinting zones of a multi-zone tintable window, it will be appreciated that similar techniques can be applied to controlling multiple tinting zones in a group of tintable windows (multi-zone or single zone). For example, a building may have an assembly of tintable windows on the facade of the building or in a room. The techniques set forth herein can be used to independently control the tintable windows of the assembly. That is, each tintable window can have one or more tinting regions, and the techniques independently control the tinting regions of the tintable windows in the assembly. It should be understood that the present invention as set forth above may be implemented in the form of control logic using computer software, in a modular or integrated manner. Based on the disclosure and teachings provided herein, those skilled in the art will know and appreciate other ways and/or methods for implementing the present invention using hardware and combinations of hardware and software. Any of the software components or functions set forth in this application may be implemented using any suitable computer language, such as, for example, Java, C++, or Python, using, for example, conventional or object-oriented techniques as will be processed by software code executed by the device. The software code may be stored as a series of instructions or commands on a computer-readable medium, such as random access memory (RAM), read-only memory (ROM), magnetic media (such as hard or floppy disks), or optical media ( such as CD-ROM). Any such computer-readable media may reside on or within a single computing device, and may reside on or within different computing devices within a system or network. While the foregoing disclosed embodiments have been set forth in some detail to facilitate understanding, the set forth embodiments are to be considered illustrative rather than limiting. It will be apparent to those skilled in the art that certain changes and modifications may be practiced within the scope of the appended claims. One or more features from any embodiment may be combined with one or more features from any other embodiment without departing from the scope of the present disclosure. In addition, modifications, additions or omissions may be made to any of the embodiments without departing from the scope of the present disclosure. Components of any embodiment may be integrated or separated according to particular needs without departing from the scope of the present disclosure.

150:房間 152:第一人造光源 154:第二人造光源 156:第三人造光源 160:可著色窗 162:第一部分 170:佔用區域 180:第二部分 190:第三部分 250:房間 252:第一人造光源 254:第二人造光源 256:第三人造光源 260:可著色窗 270:佔用區域 280:第二部分 290:第三部分 292:第一部分 300:多區可著色窗 302:第一著色區 304:著色區 306:著色區 308:著色區 310:著色區 350:房間 450:房間 460:多區可著色窗 462:第一著色區 464:第二著色區 466:著色梯度區域 550:房間 690:多區可著色窗 692:頂部部分 693:第一著色區 694:第一著色區 695:區域 696:第二著色區 697:第三著色區 698:第二著色區 699:房間 710:房間 712:多區可著色窗 730:右側房間 732:第二多區可著色窗 800:房間 1500:裝置 1550:控制器 1555:微處理器 1560:脈寬調變器 1565:信號調節模組 1570:可讀媒體 1575:組態檔案 1580:網路 1600:建築物管理系統(BMS) 1601:建築物 1602:主窗控制器 1603:主網路控制器 1605a:中間網路控制器 1605b:中間網路控制器 1610:端或葉控制器 1632:安全系統 1634:加熱/通風/空氣調節(HVAC)系統 1636:照明系統 1642:電力系統 1644:電梯或其他輸送系統 1650:窗系統 1700:系統 1701:電致變色裝置 1703:主窗控制器 1705:中間網路控制器 1710:端或葉窗控制器 1712:多感測器裝置 1740:通信網路 1790:壁開關 1800:建築物網路 1805:主網路控制器 1810:照明控制面板 1815:BMS 1820:安全控制系統 1825:使用者控制台 1830:加熱、通風及空氣調節(HVAC)系統 1835:燈 1840:安全感測器 1845:門鎖 1850:攝影機 1855:可著色窗 1940:窗控制器 1945:電壓調整器 1950:窗 1952:著色區 2062:著色區 2070:子控制器(SWC) 2100:方法 2110:操作 2120:操作 2130:操作 2140:操作 2150:操作 2160:操作 2170:操作 2180:操作 2200:流程圖 2220:操作 2230:操作 2250:操作 2260:操作 2400:房間 2410:多區窗 2412:第一著色區 2414:第二著色區 2416:第一二維光投射 2418:第二二維光投射 2420:第二二維光投射 2422:第二二維光投射 2426:第一二維光投射 2428:第二二維光投射 2450:方向/佔用區域 2460:方向 2470:方向 2700:流程圖 2710:操作 2720:操作 2730:操作 2740:操作 2750:操作 2760:步驟 150: room 152: The first artificial light source 154: The second artificial light source 156: The third artificial light source 160: Tintable windows 162: Part 1 170: occupied area 180: Part Two 190: Part III 250: room 252: The first artificial light source 254: The second artificial light source 256: The third artificial light source 260: Tintable Windows 270: occupied area 280: Part Two 290: Part Three 292: Part 1 300: Multi-zone tintable windows 302: The first coloring area 304: Coloring area 306: Coloring area 308: Coloring area 310: Coloring area 350: room 450: room 460: Multi-Zone Tinable Windows 462: The first coloring area 464:Second coloring area 466:Color gradient area 550: room 690: Multi-Zone Tinable Windows 692:top part 693: The first coloring area 694: The first coloring area 695: area 696:Second coloring area 697: The third coloring area 698:Second coloring area 699: room 710: room 712:Multi-zone tintable windows 730: Right room 732: Second Multi-Zone Tinable Windows 800: room 1500: Installation 1550: controller 1555: Microprocessor 1560: Pulse Width Modulator 1565: Signal Conditioning Module 1570: Readable media 1575: Configuration file 1580: Internet 1600: Building Management Systems (BMS) 1601: Buildings 1602: Main window controller 1603: Primary network controller 1605a: intermediate network controller 1605b: intermediate network controller 1610: End or Leaf Controller 1632: Security system 1634: Heating/Ventilation/Air Conditioning (HVAC) Systems 1636: Lighting system 1642: Power Systems 1644: Elevators or other conveying systems 1650: window system 1700: system 1701: Electrochromic device 1703: Main window controller 1705: intermediate network controller 1710: End or shutter controller 1712: Multi-sensor device 1740: Communication Networks 1790: Wall switch 1800: Building Networks 1805: Master Network Controller 1810: Lighting control panel 1815: BMS 1820: Safety Control System 1825: User Console 1830: Heating, ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC) systems 1835: lights 1840: Safety Sensor 1845: Door lock 1850: Camera 1855: Tinable Windows 1940: Window Controllers 1945: Voltage regulator 1950: windows 1952: Coloring Zone 2062: coloring area 2070: Sub-controller (SWC) 2100: method 2110: Operation 2120: Operation 2130: Operation 2140: Operation 2150: Operation 2160: Operation 2170: Operation 2180: Operation 2200: Flowchart 2220: Operation 2230: Operation 2250: Operation 2260: Operation 2400: room 2410: Multi-zone window 2412: the first coloring area 2414: the second coloring area 2416: The first two-dimensional light projection 2418:Second two-dimensional light projection 2420: Second 2D light projection 2422: Second 2D light projection 2426: The first two-dimensional light projection 2428:Second two-dimensional light projection 2450: Direction/Occupied area 2460: direction 2470: direction 2700: Flowchart 2710: Operation 2720: Operation 2730: Operation 2740: Operation 2750: Operation 2760: step

1A為根據一實施方案的、具有可著色窗之房間的透視圖之示意圖。 1B為根據一實施方案的、 1A中之房間之透視圖的示意圖且該示意圖包括對比度之繪示。 1C為根據一實施方案的、 1A中之房間之透視圖的示意圖且該示意圖包括藉由來自內部人工照明之光照偏移的 1B中之對比度的繪示。 2A為根據一實施方案的房間之透視圖的示意圖,該示意圖包括對比度之繪示。 2B為根據一實施方案的、 2A中之房間之透視圖的示意圖,該示意圖包括藉由來自內部照明之光照偏移的對比度之繪示。 3為根據一實施例的具有五個著色區之可著色窗的示意圖,其中按橫框窗組態頂部著色區處於較亮著色狀態。 4為根據一實施例的具有兩個著色區及在該等著色區之間具有著色梯度之電阻區域的多區可著色窗之示意圖,在該等著色區中頂部著色區處於比底部著色區亮之著色狀態。 5為根據一實施例的四個垂直堆疊之可著色窗的示意圖,其中中間之可著色窗處於較亮著色狀態。 6為根據一實施例的呈IGU形式之多區可著色窗之實例的示意圖,其中頂部區域具有將光引導向房間後部之一連串光管。 7為根據實施例的一建築物之左側房間及右側房間的示意圖,根據採光組態之態樣,每一房間具有一可著色窗。 8A為根據一實施例的具有若干可著色多區窗之模型化建築物的視圖。 8B 8A所示之模型化建築物的另一視圖。 9為根據一實施例的在6月21日、9月21日及12月21日來自穿過房間中之多區窗之日光的採光眩光機率(DGP)的圖。 10為根據一實施例的在6月21日、9月21日及12月21日房間中之室內亮度級的圖。 11為根據一實施例的雙區可著色窗之著色排程的圖表,該圖表包括照度級及DGP等級。 12為根據一實施例的用於具有兩個區之多區窗及用於具有三個區之多區窗之著色排程的圖表。 13示出根據實施例的具有採光區模擬之房間的兩個圖示。 14示出具有按5”之步長變化之採光著色區尺寸的所模擬房間中之綠色-藍色賦色及亮度之圖表。 15繪示根據一實施例的窗控制器之組件的簡化方塊圖。 16繪示根據一實施例的BMS之一實施例之示意圖。 17為根據實施例的用於控制一建築物之一或多個可著色窗之功能的系統之組件的方塊圖。 18繪示根據一實施方案的用於建築物之建築物網路之實施例的方塊圖。 19為根據一實施例的並聯連接至多個電壓調整器之窗控制器的示意圖。 20為根據一實施例的串聯連接至多個子控制器之窗控制器的示意圖。 21為根據實施例的用於作出用於控制多區可著色窗或多個可著色窗之多個著色區之著色決策的控制方法之流程圖。 22為根據實施例的實施用於調整人工內部照明以增強具有一或多個可著色窗之房間中之內部顯現顏色的控制邏輯之方法的流程圖。 23為根據一實施例之手動控制面板的像片。 24A為根據一實施例的具有多區窗及穿過著色區之光投射的房間之視圖的示意圖。 24B為根據一實施例的具有穿過著色區之光投射的 24A中之房間的視圖之示意圖。 圖 24C為根據一實施例的具有穿過著色區之光投射的 24A中之房間的視圖之示意圖。 25為根據一實施方案的量測到之照度對量測到之色溫的圖。 26為根據一實施方案的示出各種類型之工作場所的建築物之示意圖。 27為根據一實施方案的繪示用於一方法之控制邏輯的流程圖,該方法設計及維持在工作場所中提供佔用者滿意度及舒適性等級之環境等級的場景。 1A is a schematic diagram of a perspective view of a room with tintable windows, according to one embodiment. FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram of a perspective view of the room in FIG . 1A and includes an illustration of contrast, according to one embodiment. 1C is a schematic diagram of a perspective view of the room in FIG . 1A and includes a depiction of the contrast in FIG . 1B offset by illumination from internal artificial lighting, according to one implementation. 2A is a schematic diagram of a perspective view of a room, including an illustration of contrast , according to one embodiment. 2B is a schematic diagram of a perspective view of the room in FIG. 2A including a depiction of contrast shifted by illumination from interior lighting , according to one embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a tintable window with five tinting zones according to one embodiment, wherein the top tinting zone is in a brighter tinting state in a horizontal frame window configuration. 4 is a schematic diagram of a multi-zone tintable window having two tinting zones and a resistive zone with a tinting gradient between the tinting zones where the top tinting zone is at a lower level than the bottom tinting zone, according to one embodiment. Bright coloring state. 5 is a schematic diagram of four vertically stacked tintable windows, with the middle tintable window in a brighter tinted state, according to one embodiment. 6 is a schematic diagram of an example of a multi-zone tintable window in the form of an IGU with the top zone having a series of light pipes directing light towards the back of the room, according to one embodiment. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of a room on the left side and a room on the right side of a building according to an embodiment, each room has a tintable window according to the lighting configuration. 8A is a view of a modeled building with tintable multi-zone windows , according to one embodiment. Fig. 8B is another view of the modeled building shown in Fig. 8A . 9 is a graph of the Daylighting Glare Probability (DGP) on June 21, September 21, and December 21 from sunlight passing through a multi-zone window in a room , according to one embodiment. 10 is a graph of indoor brightness levels in a room on June 21, September 21, and December 21 , according to one embodiment. FIG. 11 is a graph of a tinting schedule for a dual-zone tintable window, including illumination levels and DGP levels, according to one embodiment. Figure 12 is a diagram of shader schedules for a multi-zone window with two zones and for a multi-zone window with three zones, according to one embodiment. Fig. 13 shows two diagrams of a room with daylighting simulation according to an embodiment. Figure 14 shows a graph of green-blue tinting and brightness in a simulated room with daylight tinting zone size varied in 5" steps. Figure 15 shows a simplification of components of a window controller according to one embodiment Block diagram. Figure 16 depicts a schematic diagram of an embodiment of a BMS according to an embodiment. Figure 17 is a block diagram of components of a system for controlling the function of one or more tintable windows of a building according to an embodiment Figure 18 depicts a block diagram of an example of a building network for a building according to one implementation. Figure 19 is a schematic diagram of a window controller connected in parallel to multiple voltage regulators according to one embodiment. Figure 20 Is a schematic diagram of a window controller connected in series to multiple sub-controllers according to one embodiment. Figure 21 is a diagram for making coloring for controlling a multi-zone tintable window or multiple tinting zones of multiple tintable windows according to an embodiment Flowchart of Control Method for Decision Making. Figure 22 is a flow chart of a method of implementing control logic for adjusting artificial interior lighting to enhance interior appearing color in a room with one or more tintable windows, according to an embodiment. Figure 23 Is a photograph of a manual control panel according to one embodiment. Figure 24A is a schematic diagram of a view of a room with multi-zone windows and light projection through tinted zones, according to one embodiment. Figure 24B is a view of a room with a through Schematic of a view of the room in Figure 24A with lightcasting through a shaded region. Figure 24C is a schematic diagram of a view of the room in Figure 24A with lightcasting through a shaded region, according to an embodiment. Figure 25 is according to an implementation Figure 26 is a schematic diagram of buildings showing various types of workplaces according to an embodiment. Figure 27 is a schematic diagram of a building showing various types of workplaces according to an embodiment. A flowchart of the control logic of a method for designing and maintaining a scenario in a workplace that provides an environmental level of occupant satisfaction and comfort levels.

2700:流程圖 2700: Flowchart

2710:操作 2710: Operation

2720:操作 2720: Operation

2730:操作 2730: Operation

2740:操作 2740: Operation

2750:操作 2750: Operation

2760:操作 2760: Operation

Claims (49)

一種自動地控制具有一或多個可著色窗之一房間中之光顏色的方法,該方法包括: 判定對該房間中之人工內部照明的調整以獲得一所要光顏色;以及 經由一通信網路發送調整該人工內部照明之控制信號; 其中基於該一或多個可著色窗中之每一者的一當前著色狀態來判定該等調整。 A method of automatically controlling the color of light in a room having one or more tintable windows, the method comprising: determining adjustments to artificial interior lighting in the room to obtain a desired light color; and Sending control signals for adjusting the artificial interior lighting via a communication network; Wherein the adjustments are determined based on a current tinting state of each of the one or more tintable windows. 如請求項1之方法,其中該所要光顏色對應於一所要演色性指數(CRI)。The method of claim 1, wherein the desired light color corresponds to a desired color rendering index (CRI). 如請求項2之方法,其進一步包括: 基於來自一或多個外部感測器之量測結果來計算一外部CRI; 使用該一或多個可著色窗之該著色狀態來將該外部CRI變換為一當前內部CRI;以及 調整該人工照明以將該當前內部CRI改變為該所要CRI。 The method of claim 2, further comprising: calculating an external CRI based on measurements from one or more external sensors; transforming the outer CRI to a current inner CRI using the tinting state of the one or more tintable windows; and The artificial lighting is adjusted to change the current internal CRI to the desired CRI. 如請求項3之方法,其中該一或多個外部感測器處於一多感測器裝置中,該多感測器裝置安裝至包括該房間之一建築物的一屋頂。The method of claim 3, wherein the one or more external sensors are in a multi-sensor device mounted to a roof of a building including the room. 如請求項3之方法,其中該一或多個外部感測器位於具有該一或多個可著色窗之一建築物立面上。The method of claim 3, wherein the one or more exterior sensors are located on a building facade having the one or more tintable windows. 如請求項2之方法,其中基於一當前內部CRI來判定該等調整,該當前內部CRI係基於來自一或多個外部感測器之天氣預報資料來判定。The method of claim 2, wherein the adjustments are determined based on a current internal CRI based on weather forecast data from one or more external sensors. 如請求項2之方法,其中基於該房間中之一當前內部CRI來判定該等調整,該當前內部CRI係基於來自一或多個內部感測器之量測結果來判定。The method of claim 2, wherein the adjustments are determined based on a current internal CRI in the room, the current internal CRI determined based on measurements from one or more internal sensors. 如請求項7之方法,其中該一或多個內部感測器位於該房間之一佔用者的一活動區域中。The method of claim 7, wherein the one or more interior sensors are located in an active area of an occupant of the room. 如請求項7之方法,其中該一或多個內部感測器位於該人工內部照明處或附近。The method of claim 7, wherein the one or more interior sensors are located at or near the artificial interior lighting. 如請求項1之方法,其進一步包括判定是使用一或多個外部感測器還是一或多個內部感測器來判定對該內部照明之調整。The method of claim 1, further comprising determining whether to use one or more external sensors or one or more internal sensors to determine the adjustment to the interior lighting. 如請求項2之方法,其進一步包括基於使用者輸入來判定該所要CRI。The method of claim 2, further comprising determining the desired CRI based on user input. 如請求項11之方法,其中基於使用者輸入之歷史資料來判定該所要CRI。The method of claim 11, wherein the desired CRI is determined based on historical data input by a user. 如請求項11之方法,其中基於一牆壁單元處之使用者輸入來判定該所要CRI。The method of claim 11, wherein the desired CRI is determined based on user input at a wall unit. 如請求項11之方法,其中該等調整包括選擇一種或多種顏色、啟動特定位置中之燈及選擇燈之強度等級中之一或多者。The method of claim 11, wherein the adjustments include one or more of selecting one or more colors, activating lights in specific locations, and selecting intensity levels of lights. 如請求項2之方法,其進一步包括: 基於一所判定之晴空輻照度來計算一外部CRI;以及 使用該一或多個可著色窗之該著色狀態來將該外部CRI變換為該當前內部CRI。 The method of claim 2, further comprising: calculating an external CRI based on a determined clear-air irradiance; and The tinting state of the one or more tintable windows is used to transform the outer CRI to the current inner CRI. 如請求項15之方法,其進一步包括基於太陽位置及窗組態來判定該晴空輻照度。The method of claim 15, further comprising determining the clear sky irradiance based on sun position and window configuration. 如請求項2之方法,其進一步包括: 基於該所要CRI來判定該一或多個可著色窗之一新著色等級;以及 經由該通信網路提供將該一或多個可著色窗之著色轉變至該新著色等級的指令。 The method of claim 2, further comprising: determining a new tinting level of the one or more tintable windows based on the desired CRI; and Instructions are provided via the communications network to transition the tinting of the one or more tintable windows to the new tinting level. 如請求項2之方法,其進一步包括: 基於一所判定之晴空輻照度來計算一外部CRI; 使用該一或多個可著色窗中之每一者的該著色狀態來將該外部CRI變換為一當前內部CRI;以及 其中基於該當前內部CRI來判定對該內部照明之調整。 The method of claim 2, further comprising: calculating an external CRI based on a determined clear-air irradiance; transforming the outer CRI to a current inner CRI using the tinting state of each of the one or more tintable windows; and Wherein an adjustment to the interior lighting is determined based on the current interior CRI. 如請求項1之方法,其中該一或多個可著色窗中之每一者為一電致變色窗。The method of claim 1, wherein each of the one or more tintable windows is an electrochromic window. 如請求項19之方法,其中該等電致變色窗僅包括固態及無機電致變色裝置。The method of claim 19, wherein the electrochromic windows include only solid state and inorganic electrochromic devices. 如請求項1之方法,其中該房間中之該所要光顏色與減小一佔用區域中之一對比率使之處於一可接受範圍內或低於一最大對比率相關聯。The method of claim 1, wherein the desired light color in the room is associated with reducing a contrast ratio in an occupied area to be within an acceptable range or below a maximum contrast ratio. 如請求項1之方法,其中對該人工內部照明之該等調整產生具有一第一波長範圍之光照,該第一波長範圍與投射穿過處於該當前著色狀態之該等可著色窗中之一者之光的一第二波長範圍互補。The method of claim 1 , wherein the adjustments to the artificial interior lighting produce light having a first wavelength range that projects through one of the tintable windows in the current tinting state A second wavelength range of the light of the latter is complementary. 如請求項1之方法,其中判定對該人工內部照明之該等調整以減小該房間之一佔用區域中的一對比率。The method of claim 1, wherein the adjustments to the artificial interior lighting are determined to reduce a ratio in an occupied area of the room. 如請求項1之方法,其中對該人工內部照明之該等調整產生某種光照,該光照結合來自穿過處於該當前著色狀態之該等可著色窗中之一者的該光投射之光照產生具有紅光、藍光及綠光之一光譜內容。The method of claim 1, wherein the adjustments to the artificial interior lighting produce a lighting that is produced in combination with lighting from the lightcast through one of the tintable windows in the current tinting state It has one of red light, blue light and green light spectral content. 如請求項1之方法,其中對該人工內部照明之該等調整產生某種光照,該光照結合來自穿過處於該當前著色狀態之該等可著色窗中之一者的該光投射之光照產生與自然光相關聯之一光譜內容。The method of claim 1, wherein the adjustments to the artificial interior lighting produce a lighting that is produced in combination with lighting from the lightcast through one of the tintable windows in the current tinting state One of the spectral content associated with natural light. 如請求項1之方法,其中該房間中之該所要光顏色包括紅光、藍光及綠光之波長。The method of claim 1, wherein the desired light color in the room includes wavelengths of red light, blue light and green light. 如請求項1之方法,其中該房間中之該所要光顏色包括與自然光相關聯之一光譜內容。The method of claim 1, wherein the desired color of light in the room includes a spectral content associated with natural light. 如請求項1之方法,其進一步包括: 判定該一或多個可著色窗之一新著色狀態;以及 經由該通信網路發送將該一或多個可著色窗調整為該新著色狀態的控制信號; 其中對該人工內部照明之該等調整及使該一或多個可著色窗變為該新著色狀態之該等調整產生照射一佔用區域中之一表面的一組合光照,該組合光照具有紅光、藍光及綠光之一光譜內容。 The method of claim 1, further comprising: determining a new tinting state of the one or more tintable windows; and sending a control signal via the communications network to adjust the one or more tintable windows to the new tinting state; wherein the adjustments to the artificial interior lighting and the adjustments to the new tinted state of the one or more tintable windows produce a combined light that illuminates a surface in an occupied area, the combined light having red light , one of blue light and green light spectral content. 如請求項1之方法,其進一步包括: 判定該一或多個可著色窗之一新著色狀態;以及 經由該通信網路發送將該一或多個可著色窗調整為該新著色狀態的控制信號; 其中對該人工內部照明之該等調整及使該一或多個可著色窗變為該新著色狀態之該等調整產生照射一佔用區域中之一表面的一組合光照,該組合光照具有與自然光相關聯之一光譜內容。 The method of claim 1, further comprising: determining a new tinting state of the one or more tintable windows; and sending a control signal via the communications network to adjust the one or more tintable windows to the new tinting state; wherein the adjustments to the artificial interior lighting and the adjustments to bringing the one or more tintable windows to the new tinted state produce a combined lighting that illuminates a surface in an occupied area having the same characteristics as natural light Associate one of the spectral content. 一種用於自動地控制具有一或多個可著色窗之一房間中之光顏色的控制器,該控制器包括: 一電腦可讀媒體,該電腦可讀媒體具有控制邏輯;以及 一處理器,該處理器經由一通信網路與該電腦可讀媒體及與該一或多個可著色窗通信, 其中該控制邏輯經組態以: 判定對該房間中之人工內部照明之調整以在該房間中獲得一所要光顏色,其中基於該一或多個可著色窗之一當前著色狀態來判定該等調整;以及 經由該通信網路發送調整該人工內部照明之控制信號。 A controller for automatically controlling the color of light in a room having one or more tintable windows, the controller comprising: a computer readable medium having control logic; and a processor in communication with the computer readable medium and with the one or more tintable windows via a communications network, where the control logic is configured to: determining adjustments to artificial interior lighting in the room to obtain a desired light color in the room, wherein the adjustments are determined based on a current tinting state of the one or more tintable windows; and A control signal for adjusting the artificial interior lighting is sent via the communication network. 一種控制具有一或多個可著色窗之一工作場所中的一場景之環境因素的方法,該方法包括: 判定工作場所之一類型及佔用之一類型; 基於建築物系統之控制的可用性來界定該場景中之一組環境因素; 基於該工作場所之該類型及佔用之該類型來計算該場景之該等環境因素的目標等級; 判定用於獲得該等環境因素之該等目標等級的對該等建築物系統之調整,其中基於該一或多個可著色窗之當前著色等級來判定該等調整;以及 經由一通信網路發送調整該等建築物系統之控制信號。 A method of controlling environmental factors of a scene in a workplace having one or more tintable windows, the method comprising: Determine one type of workplace and one type of occupancy; Defining a set of environmental factors in the scenario based on the availability of controls for the building systems; Calculate the target level for the environmental factors of the scene based on the type of the workplace and the type of occupancy; determining adjustments to the building systems for achieving the target levels of the environmental factors, wherein the adjustments are determined based on the current tinting level of the one or more tintable windows; and Control signals for adjusting the building systems are sent via a communication network. 如請求項31之方法,其進一步包括經由一通信網路自該等建築物系統接收回饋,其中該回饋包括聲資料、溫度讀數、濕度讀數、空氣品質讀數、照度及顏色量測結果、映射資料及該一或多個可著色窗中之每一者之該當前著色等級中的一或多者。The method of claim 31, further comprising receiving feedback from the building systems via a communication network, wherein the feedback includes acoustic data, temperature readings, humidity readings, air quality readings, illuminance and color measurements, mapping data and one or more of the current tinting level for each of the one or more tintable windows. 如請求項31之方法,其中佔用者之該類型包括年齡、性別、職業、晝夜節律、活動及生命徵象中之一或多者。The method of claim 31, wherein the type of occupant includes one or more of age, gender, occupation, circadian rhythm, activity, and vital signs. 如請求項31之方法,其進一步包括藉由判定該工作場所中一或多個佔用者之存在來判定該工作場所中之佔用。The method of claim 31, further comprising determining occupancy in the workplace by determining the presence of one or more occupants in the workplace. 如請求項34之方法,其中根據經由一通信網路自一映射系統接收到之資料來判定該工作場所中之存在,其中該映射系統包括用於傳送電磁波之一接收器及一發射器。The method of claim 34, wherein the presence in the workplace is determined based on data received via a communication network from a mapping system, wherein the mapping system includes a receiver and a transmitter for transmitting electromagnetic waves. 如請求項31之方法,其中該組環境因素與一或多個視覺舒適性、聲舒適性、熱舒適性及空氣品質相關聯。The method of claim 31, wherein the set of environmental factors is associated with one or more of visual comfort, acoustic comfort, thermal comfort, and air quality. 如請求項31之方法,其中該組環境因素包括亮度級、色溫、聲級、隱私指數及空氣品質。The method according to claim 31, wherein the set of environmental factors includes brightness level, color temperature, sound level, privacy index and air quality. 如請求項31之方法,其中計算該場景之該等環境因素之該等目標等級包括將該工作場所之該所判定類型及佔用之該類型與具有目標等級之一所儲存場景匹配。The method of claim 31 , wherein calculating the target levels for the environmental factors of the scene includes matching the determined type of workplace and the type of occupancy to a stored scene with a target level. 如請求項31之方法,其中判定對該等建築物系統之調整包括使用與環境等級對應的建築物系統之設置的一查找表。The method of claim 31, wherein determining adjustments to the building systems includes using a lookup table of settings of building systems corresponding to environmental classes. 如請求項31之方法,其中該一或多個可著色窗中之每一者為一電致變色窗。The method of claim 31, wherein each of the one or more tintable windows is an electrochromic window. 如請求項40之方法,其中該等電致變色窗僅包括固態及無機電致變色裝置。The method of claim 40, wherein the electrochromic windows include only solid state and inorganic electrochromic devices. 如請求項31之方法,其中判定用於獲得該等環境因素之該等目標等級的對該等建築物系統之調整包括判定該工作場所中之人工內部照明的調整以獲得一所要光顏色。The method of claim 31, wherein determining adjustments to the building systems for achieving the target levels of the environmental factors comprises determining adjustments to artificial interior lighting in the workplace to achieve a desired light color. 如請求項42之方法,其中該工作場所中之該所要光顏色與產生在一可接受範圍內或低於一最大對比率的在一佔用區域中之一對比率相關聯。The method of claim 42, wherein the desired light color in the workplace is associated with a contrast ratio in an occupied area that results in an acceptable range or below a maximum contrast ratio. 如請求項42之方法,其中對該人工內部照明之該等調整產生具有一第一波長範圍之光照,該第一波長範圍與投射穿過處於該當前著色狀態之該等可著色窗中之一者之光的一第二波長範圍互補。The method of claim 42, wherein the adjustments to the artificial interior lighting produce light having a first wavelength range that projects through one of the tintable windows in the current tinting state A second wavelength range of the light of the latter is complementary. 如請求項42之方法,其中對該人工內部照明之該等調整係用於減小該工作場所之一佔用區域中的一對比率。The method of claim 42, wherein the adjustments to the artificial interior lighting are used to reduce a ratio in an occupied area of the workplace. 如請求項42之方法,其中對該人工內部照明之該等調整產生某種光照,該光照結合來自穿過處於該當前著色狀態之該等可著色窗中之一者的該光投射之光照產生具有紅光、藍光及綠光之一光譜內容。The method of claim 42, wherein the adjustments to the artificial interior lighting produce an illumination produced in combination with illumination from the lightcast through one of the tintable windows in the current tinting state It has one of red light, blue light and green light spectral content. 如請求項42之方法,其中對該人工內部照明之該等調整產生某種光照,該光照結合來自穿過處於該當前著色狀態之該等可著色窗中之一者的該光投射之光照產生與自然光相關聯之一光譜內容。The method of claim 42, wherein the adjustments to the artificial interior lighting produce an illumination produced in combination with illumination from the lightcast through one of the tintable windows in the current tinting state One of the spectral content associated with natural light. 如請求項42之方法,其進一步包括: 判定該一或多個可著色窗之一新著色狀態;以及 經由該通信網路發送將該一或多個可著色窗調整為該新著色狀態的控制信號; 其中對該人工內部照明之該等調整及使該一或多個可著色窗變為該新著色狀態之該等調整產生照射一佔用區域中之一表面的一組合光照,該組合光照具有與自然光相關聯之一光譜內容。 The method of claim 42, further comprising: determining a new tinting state of the one or more tintable windows; and sending a control signal via the communications network to adjust the one or more tintable windows to the new tinting state; wherein the adjustments to the artificial interior lighting and the adjustments to bringing the one or more tintable windows to the new tinted state produce a combined lighting that illuminates a surface in an occupied area having the same characteristics as natural light Associate one of the spectral content. 一種用於自動地控制具有一或多個可著色窗之一工作場所中的一場景之環境因素的控制器,該控制器包括: 一電腦可讀媒體,該電腦可讀媒體具有控制邏輯;以及 一處理器,該處理器經由一通信網路與該電腦可讀媒體及與該一或多個可著色窗通信, 其中該控制邏輯經組態以: 判定該工作場所中之佔用; 判定工作場所之一類型及佔用之一類型; 基於建築物系統之控制的可用性來界定該場景中之一組環境因素; 基於該工作場所之該類型及佔用之該類型來計算該場景之該等環境因素的目標等級; 判定用於獲得該等環境因素之該等目標等級的對該等建築物系統之調整,其中基於該一或多個可著色窗之當前著色等級來判定該等調整;以及 經由一通信網路發送調整該等建築物系統之控制信號。 A controller for automatically controlling environmental factors of a scene in a workplace having one or more tintable windows, the controller comprising: a computer readable medium having control logic; and a processor in communication with the computer readable medium and with the one or more tintable windows via a communications network, where the control logic is configured to: determine the occupancy in the workplace; Determine one type of workplace and one type of occupancy; Defining a set of environmental factors in the scenario based on the availability of controls for the building systems; Calculate the target level for the environmental factors of the scene based on the type of the workplace and the type of occupancy; determining adjustments to the building systems for achieving the target levels of the environmental factors, wherein the adjustments are determined based on the current tinting level of the one or more tintable windows; and Control signals for adjusting the building systems are sent via a communication network.
TW111117328A 2017-02-27 2018-02-26 Adjusting interior lighting based on dynamic glass tinting TWI800374B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US201762464299P 2017-02-27 2017-02-27
US62/464,299 2017-02-27

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW202306919A true TW202306919A (en) 2023-02-16
TWI800374B TWI800374B (en) 2023-04-21

Family

ID=63254110

Family Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW107106439A TWI765975B (en) 2017-02-27 2018-02-26 Adjusting interior lighting based on dynamic glass tinting
TW111117328A TWI800374B (en) 2017-02-27 2018-02-26 Adjusting interior lighting based on dynamic glass tinting

Family Applications Before (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW107106439A TWI765975B (en) 2017-02-27 2018-02-26 Adjusting interior lighting based on dynamic glass tinting

Country Status (5)

Country Link
EP (1) EP3586574A4 (en)
CN (1) CN110476485B (en)
CA (1) CA3054786A1 (en)
TW (2) TWI765975B (en)
WO (1) WO2018157063A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (30)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11822202B2 (en) 2011-03-16 2023-11-21 View, Inc. Controlling transitions in optically switchable devices
US9645465B2 (en) 2011-03-16 2017-05-09 View, Inc. Controlling transitions in optically switchable devices
US8705162B2 (en) 2012-04-17 2014-04-22 View, Inc. Controlling transitions in optically switchable devices
US9454055B2 (en) 2011-03-16 2016-09-27 View, Inc. Multipurpose controller for multistate windows
CN106930675B (en) 2011-10-21 2019-05-28 唯景公司 Mitigate the thermal shock in pigmentable window
US12429742B2 (en) 2012-03-13 2025-09-30 View Operating Corporation Methods of controlling multi-zone tintable windows
US11635666B2 (en) 2012-03-13 2023-04-25 View, Inc Methods of controlling multi-zone tintable windows
US11950340B2 (en) 2012-03-13 2024-04-02 View, Inc. Adjusting interior lighting based on dynamic glass tinting
US11674843B2 (en) 2015-10-06 2023-06-13 View, Inc. Infrared cloud detector systems and methods
US10048561B2 (en) 2013-02-21 2018-08-14 View, Inc. Control method for tintable windows
US9638978B2 (en) 2013-02-21 2017-05-02 View, Inc. Control method for tintable windows
EP3297218B1 (en) 2012-08-28 2020-10-21 Delos Living, LLC Environmental control system and method of operation such system
US11719990B2 (en) 2013-02-21 2023-08-08 View, Inc. Control method for tintable windows
US11960190B2 (en) 2013-02-21 2024-04-16 View, Inc. Control methods and systems using external 3D modeling and schedule-based computing
US11966142B2 (en) 2013-02-21 2024-04-23 View, Inc. Control methods and systems using outside temperature as a driver for changing window tint states
WO2015130786A1 (en) 2014-02-28 2015-09-03 Delos Living Llc Systems, methods and articles for enhancing wellness associated with habitable environments
TWI823168B (en) 2015-07-07 2023-11-21 美商唯景公司 Viewcontrol methods for tintable windows
US11255722B2 (en) 2015-10-06 2022-02-22 View, Inc. Infrared cloud detector systems and methods
US11668481B2 (en) 2017-08-30 2023-06-06 Delos Living Llc Systems, methods and articles for assessing and/or improving health and well-being
EP3850458A4 (en) 2018-09-14 2022-06-08 Delos Living, LLC Systems and methods for air remediation
ES3000532T3 (en) 2018-12-20 2025-02-28 Sollum Tech Inc Method and system of supplementing the spectral content of illuminating light based on a target illumination spectrum
US11844163B2 (en) * 2019-02-26 2023-12-12 Delos Living Llc Method and apparatus for lighting in an office environment
WO2020198183A1 (en) 2019-03-25 2020-10-01 Delos Living Llc Systems and methods for acoustic monitoring
TWI720652B (en) * 2019-10-15 2021-03-01 潤弘精密工程事業股份有限公司 Method and system for processing building energy information
US11630927B2 (en) 2019-10-15 2023-04-18 Ruentex Engineering & Construction Co., Ltd. Method and system for processing building energy information
CN111194126A (en) * 2020-02-24 2020-05-22 北方工业大学 Interactive shading system and method based on personnel positioning
CN111441705B (en) * 2020-04-03 2022-03-11 哈尔滨工业大学 Building adaptive skin shading system and control method that can sense user behavior
CN111474797B (en) * 2020-05-08 2024-01-30 深圳市光羿科技有限公司 Control method of electrochromic glass and electrochromic glass
US12328804B2 (en) * 2020-09-04 2025-06-10 Signify Holding B.V. Determining a location for a presence sensor or light switch based on a control history
CN112996202A (en) * 2021-03-05 2021-06-18 浙江理工大学 Indoor illumination control system and regulation and control method based on energy conservation

Family Cites Families (19)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN101421558B (en) * 2003-03-24 2011-10-05 路创电子公司 Systems to control daylight and artificial lighting and sun glare in spaces
US8723467B2 (en) * 2004-05-06 2014-05-13 Mechoshade Systems, Inc. Automated shade control in connection with electrochromic glass
US8836263B2 (en) * 2004-05-06 2014-09-16 Mechoshade Systems, Inc. Automated shade control in connection with electrochromic glass
CN101395521B (en) * 2006-03-03 2010-09-29 金泰克斯公司 Improved thin film coatings, photovoltaic elements and assemblies containing these elements
US8368992B2 (en) * 2006-03-03 2013-02-05 Gentex Corporation Electro-optical element including IMI coatings
EP2082163B1 (en) * 2006-10-17 2014-12-17 ChromoGenics AB Indoor light balancing
WO2008146219A1 (en) * 2007-05-31 2008-12-04 Koninklijke Philips Electronics, N.V. Method and system for providing illumination and physiological stimuli
WO2009044330A1 (en) * 2007-10-02 2009-04-09 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Lighting system, and method and computer program for controlling the lighting system
FR2969325B1 (en) * 2010-12-16 2013-08-16 Saint Gobain SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING ACTIVE GLAZING MANAGING THE COLOR OF LIGHT IN A BUILDING
TW201231789A (en) * 2011-01-21 2012-08-01 E Ink Holdings Inc Smart window and smart window system using the same
CN202110359U (en) * 2011-05-25 2012-01-11 王麒 Intelligent nanometer glass
EP2566303B1 (en) * 2011-09-02 2018-02-28 Nxp B.V. Lighting system
US9638978B2 (en) * 2013-02-21 2017-05-02 View, Inc. Control method for tintable windows
JP6422860B2 (en) * 2012-05-24 2018-11-14 フィリップス ライティング ホールディング ビー ヴィ Lighting system for reducing delirium, especially in intensive care units
EP3297218B1 (en) * 2012-08-28 2020-10-21 Delos Living, LLC Environmental control system and method of operation such system
US20150092259A1 (en) * 2013-10-01 2015-04-02 Sage Electrochromics, Inc. Control System For Color Rendering Of Optical Glazings
CA2940418A1 (en) * 2014-02-28 2015-09-03 Bombardier Inc. Method, system, and executable program product for controlling lighting
KR20220156104A (en) * 2014-05-09 2022-11-24 뷰, 인크. Control method for tintable windows
CN105549293B (en) * 2016-03-08 2019-09-27 北京工业大学 Design and construction method of an ergonomic intelligent window system

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP3586574A4 (en) 2021-01-06
TW201838945A (en) 2018-11-01
TWI800374B (en) 2023-04-21
CN110476485B (en) 2023-05-23
WO2018157063A1 (en) 2018-08-30
TWI765975B (en) 2022-06-01
EP3586574A1 (en) 2020-01-01
CA3054786A1 (en) 2018-08-30
CN110476485A (en) 2019-11-19

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
TWI765975B (en) Adjusting interior lighting based on dynamic glass tinting
US11950340B2 (en) Adjusting interior lighting based on dynamic glass tinting
US20230004059A1 (en) Methods of controlling multi-zone tintable windows
US11635666B2 (en) Methods of controlling multi-zone tintable windows
US12429742B2 (en) Methods of controlling multi-zone tintable windows
JP6944430B2 (en) Color rendering control system for optical glazing
CN112004984B (en) Method, apparatus and computer readable medium for determining hue level of tintable windows
CN111061110B (en) Control method for tintable windows
CN107850815B (en) Control method for tintable windows
Fernandes et al. Lighting energy savings potential of split-pane electrochromic windows controlled for daylighting with visual comfort
CN104321497B (en) Controlling the Switching of Optically Switchable Devices
JP2020514576A (en) Control method for tint adjustable windows
KR20150133728A (en) Control method for tintable windows
Lee et al. Demonstration of Energy Efficient Retrofits for Lighting and Daylighting in New York City Office Buildings
WO2008149285A1 (en) Window blind
Gentile et al. Evaluation of integrated daylighting and electric lighting design projects: Lessons learned
Lee et al. Electrochromic Window Demonstration at the 911 Federal Building, 911 Northeast 11th Avenue, Portland, Oregon